JP2018175557A - Device for games - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a device for games capable of appropriately making a notification of information particularly on a termination of being in an advantageous section, even if in a game machine a plurality of advantageous game states are managed as a series of advantageous sections.SOLUTION: In a display device 1 for games, if a specific display start condition is established that is associated with a termination condition of an advantageous section, information indicating a residual number of times of games in the advantageous section or information indicating a termination of the advantageous section is to be notified.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 58

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming apparatus corresponding to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine.

  In a game arcade where a game machine is installed, various game devices are connected to the game machine. In such a gaming machine, various controls are performed based on information transmitted from the gaming machine. As one of such gaming machines, a gaming information display unit (both a data display unit and each stand display unit) that enables display of statistical information such as game results and display of the gaming state of the gaming machine etc. Say). The player can select a gaming machine to play a game, using various information displayed on such a gaming information display device as a clue.

  In recent years, in the gaming information display device connected to a gaming machine capable of operating a specific game state and a special game state different from each other, the start condition is an advantageous game state advantageous to the player. What made it possible to perform the production | presentation display of a different content with the production | presentation display in a special gaming state is proposed (for example, refer patent document 1).

JP, 2015-96100, A

  By the way, when there are a plurality of gaming states as an advantageous gaming state as in the gaming machine described above, a series of gaming machines may be used even if these gaming states are mutually transferred in practice. It may be managed as an advantageous gaming state (advantage zone). In addition, in such a gaming machine, when such an advantageous section continues for a certain period of time, control may be performed to forcibly end the advantageous section from the viewpoint of soundness of prosperity.

  Here, for example, when management and control of such an advantageous section are performed on the gaming machine side, it is necessary for the gaming apparatus side to perform control in accordance therewith. In particular, in order to notify the player of information regarding the end of the advantageous section, it is required to appropriately notify the information.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and particularly in the gaming machine, even when a plurality of advantageous gaming states are managed as a series of advantageous sections, information regarding the end of the advantageous sections. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming apparatus capable of appropriately notifying

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming apparatus according to the present invention is:
When a predetermined start condition (for example, an advantageous section start condition) is satisfied, an advantageous section advantageous to the player is started, and when a predetermined end condition (for example, an advantageous section end condition) is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended. The game has a normal gaming state (for example, normal gaming state) and a special gaming state (for example, BB gaming state), and in the advantageous section, any gaming state is the normal gaming state or the special gaming state The gaming device (for example, the gaming display device 1) is connectable to a gaming machine (for example, the pachislot gaming machine 2b) which continues the advantageous section until the predetermined termination condition is satisfied regardless of whether ,
Information display means (for example, screen units 11A to 11F) for displaying various information;
Display control means (for example, control unit 100) for controlling the information display means;
Advantageous section determination means (for example, display CPU 101) that determines whether or not the gaming machine is in the advantageous section according to the operation of the gaming machine;
Special game state determination means (for example, display CPU 101) that determines whether or not the game machine is in the special game state according to the operation of the game machine;
When it is determined by the advantageous section judging means that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section, whether or not the special game state judging section judges that the gaming machine is in the special game state or not And a means for counting the number of games played during the advantageous section (for example, an advantageous section counter) for counting the number of games played in the advantageous section in accordance with the operation of the gaming machine.
When the specific display start condition associated with the predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example, when the advantageous area counter becomes “1495” or more), the display control means plays the remaining games of the advantageous area Information indicating the number of times or information indicating the end of the advantageous section is displayed on the information display means.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when a specific display start condition associated with the termination condition of the advantageous segment is satisfied, information indicating the number of remaining games played in the advantageous segment, or indicating that the advantageous segment is terminated. Information is to be notified. Therefore, in the gaming machine, even when a plurality of advantageous gaming states are managed as a series of advantageous sections, it is possible to appropriately notify information on the end of the advantageous sections, in particular.

In addition, the game apparatus according to the present invention is
When the gaming machine starts the advantageous section, it outputs a first signal (for example, an advantageous section signal) to the gaming apparatus until the advantageous section is ended, and starts the special gaming state. A second signal (for example, a bonus in-progress signal) is output to the gaming device until the special gaming state is ended, and a unit game is started, the third signal (for example, a medal insertion signal) is Output to the gaming device,
The advantageous section judging means judges that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section when the first signal is inputted from the gaming machine.
The special gaming state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in the special gaming state when the second signal is input from the gaming machine.
When the third signal during the advantageous section is input from the gaming machine, the game number counting means counts the number of games during the advantageous section.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, various judgments and various countings are performed in accordance with various signals input from the gaming machine, so that the state of the gaming machine can be notified more appropriately. be able to.

In addition, the game apparatus according to the present invention is
The display control means
When it is determined that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section by the advantageous section judging means, and it is judged that the gaming machine is not in the special gaming state by the special gaming state judging section, the information display means Display the status,
When it is determined that the gaming machine is not in the advantageous section by the advantageous section judging means, and it is judged that the gaming machine is in the special gaming state by the special game state judging section, the second information display means Display the status,
When it is determined by the advantageous section judging means that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section, and when the special gaming state judging section judges that the gaming machine is in the special gaming state, the information display means It is characterized in that three states are displayed.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the display of the first state is performed when the game is in the advantageous section and not in the special game mode, and is in the second state when the special game is not in the advantageous section. The display is performed, and the display of the third state is performed when in the advantageous section and in the special game state. Therefore, in the gaming machine, even when a plurality of advantageous gaming states are managed as a series of advantageous sections, information desired by the player can be notified as appropriately as possible.

  According to the present invention, in the gaming machine, even when a plurality of advantageous gaming states are managed as a series of advantageous sections, in particular, it is a gaming apparatus capable of appropriately notifying information on the end of the advantageous sections. Can be provided.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS The schematic diagram which shows the game system containing the display apparatus for games which concerns on 1st Embodiment. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS The whole perspective view of the display apparatus for games which concerns on 1st Embodiment. The disassembled perspective view of the display apparatus for games which concerns on 1st Embodiment. The perspective view which shows the screen unit of the display apparatus for games which concerns on 1st Embodiment from the back side. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing a plurality of replaceable screen units in the game display device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing display areas of a plurality of screen units shown in FIG. 5; BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS The schematic diagram which illustrates the display content of the display apparatus for games which concerns on 1st Embodiment. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display principle of the display apparatus for games which concerns on 1st Embodiment. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the difference in the display form of the display apparatus for games which concerns on 1st Embodiment. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 1st display example of the display apparatus for games which concerns on 1st Embodiment. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 2nd display example of the display apparatus for games which concerns on 1st Embodiment. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 3rd display example of the display apparatus for games which concerns on 1st Embodiment. The back perspective view of the screen unit of the display apparatus for games concerning 2nd Embodiment. The disassembled perspective view of the display apparatus for games which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. Operation | movement explanatory drawing of the movable decoration sheet | seat of the display apparatus for games which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the difference in the brightness | luminance by the positional relationship of the movable decorative sheet of the display apparatus for games which concerns on 3rd Embodiment, and a fixed decorative sheet. The disassembled perspective view of the display apparatus for games which concerns on 4th Embodiment. The whole perspective view (the 1) of the game machine which applied the display for games concerning a 4th embodiment. The whole perspective view (the 2) of the game machine which applied the display for games concerning a 4th embodiment. The whole perspective view of the display apparatus for games concerning 5th Embodiment. Sectional drawing of the display apparatus for games which concerns on 5th Embodiment. The whole perspective view of the display apparatus for games which concerns on the modification 1 of 5th Embodiment. The whole perspective view of the display apparatus for games which concerns on the modification 2 of 5th Embodiment. (A) is sectional drawing of the display apparatus for games which concerns on 6th Embodiment, (b) is the principal part enlarged view. Sectional drawing of the display apparatus for games which concerns on the modification 1 of 6th Embodiment. Sectional drawing of the display apparatus for games which concerns on the modification 2 of 6th Embodiment. Sectional drawing of the display apparatus for games which concerns on 7th Embodiment. Sectional drawing of the display apparatus for games which concerns on the modification 1 of 7th Embodiment. Sectional drawing of the display apparatus for games which concerns on the modification 2 of 7th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a perspective view of a game device according to an eighth embodiment. The disassembled perspective view of the game device which concerns on 8th Embodiment. The disassembled perspective view which shows the game device which concerns on 8th Embodiment from the back side. The disassembled perspective view which shows the game device which concerns on 8th Embodiment from the back side. Explanatory drawing which shows an example of the optical path pattern of the light from LED which advances the light-guide plate which concerns on 8th Embodiment. Explanatory drawing which shows an example of the optical path pattern of the light from LED which advances the light-guide plate which concerns on 8th Embodiment. Explanatory drawing which shows an example of the illumination aspect of the light-guide plate which concerns on 8th Embodiment. The disassembled perspective view which shows the game device which concerns on 8th Embodiment from the back side. The perspective view of the projector container which the game device concerning a 9th embodiment has. The disassembled perspective view of the projector container which the game device which concerns on 9th Embodiment has. FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a projector housing according to a ninth embodiment. The flowchart of the control processing which the control circuit concerning a 9th embodiment performs. Explanatory drawing which shows one specific example of a structure of the game machine to which the display apparatus for game (game apparatus) which concerns on 1st thru | or 9th embodiment is connected. Explanatory drawing which shows one specific example of a structure of the game machine to which the display apparatus for game (game apparatus) which concerns on 1st thru | or 9th embodiment is connected. Explanatory drawing which shows one specific example of a structure of the game machine to which the display apparatus for game (game apparatus) which concerns on 1st thru | or 9th embodiment is connected. Explanatory drawing which shows one specific example of a structure of the game machine to which the display apparatus for game (game apparatus) which concerns on 1st thru | or 9th embodiment is connected. Explanatory drawing which shows one specific example of a structure of the game machine to which the display apparatus for game (game apparatus) which concerns on 1st thru | or 9th embodiment is connected. Explanatory drawing which shows the 1st specification example of the game machine to which the display apparatus (game apparatus) for games which concerns on 1st thru | or 9th embodiment is connected. Explanatory drawing which shows the 1st specification example of the game machine to which the display apparatus (game apparatus) for games which concerns on 1st thru | or 9th embodiment is connected. Explanatory drawing which shows the 1st specification example of the game machine to which the display apparatus (game apparatus) for games which concerns on 1st thru | or 9th embodiment is connected. Explanatory drawing which shows the 2nd specification example of the game machine to which the display apparatus (game apparatus) for games which concerns on 1st thru | or 9th embodiment is connected. Explanatory drawing which shows the 2nd specification example of the game machine to which the display apparatus (game apparatus) for games which concerns on 1st thru | or 9th embodiment is connected. Explanatory drawing which shows the 2nd specification example of the game machine to which the display apparatus (game apparatus) for games which concerns on 1st thru | or 9th embodiment is connected. The figure which shows an example of the flowchart of the control processing of the display apparatus (game apparatus) for games concerning 1st thru | or 9th embodiment in case the game machine which concerns on a 1st specification example is connected. The figure which shows an example of the flowchart of the control processing of the display apparatus (game apparatus) for games concerning 1st thru | or 9th embodiment in case the game machine which concerns on a 1st specification example is connected. The figure which shows an example of the timing chart of each control processing in case the display apparatus for game (game apparatus) which concerns on 1st thru | or 9th embodiment and the game machine which concerns on a 1st specification example are connected. The figure which shows an example of the timing chart of each control processing in case the display apparatus for game (game apparatus) which concerns on 1st thru | or 9th embodiment and the game machine which concerns on a 1st specification example are connected. Explanatory drawing which shows the basic display screen of the display apparatus (game apparatus) for games which concerns on the 1st thru | or 9th embodiment in case the game machine of a 1st specification example is connected. Explanatory drawing which shows the log | history display screen of the display apparatus (game apparatus) for games which concerns on the 1st thru | or 9th embodiment in case the game machine of a 1st specification example is connected. Explanatory drawing which shows the log | history display screen of the display apparatus (game apparatus) for games which concerns on the 1st thru | or 9th embodiment in case the game machine of a 1st specification example is connected. The figure which shows an example of the flowchart of the control processing of the display apparatus (game apparatus) for games concerning 1st thru | or 9th embodiment in case the game machine which concerns on a 2nd specification example is connected. The figure which shows an example of the flowchart of the control processing of the display apparatus (game apparatus) for games concerning 1st thru | or 9th embodiment in case the game machine which concerns on a 2nd specification example is connected. The figure which shows an example of the timing chart of each control processing in, when the display apparatus for game (game device) which concerns on 1st thru | or 9th embodiment and the game machine which concerns on a 2nd specification example are connected. The figure which shows an example of the timing chart of each control processing in, when the display apparatus for game (game device) which concerns on 1st thru | or 9th embodiment and the game machine which concerns on a 2nd specification example are connected. The figure which shows an example of the timing chart of each control processing in, when the display apparatus for game (game device) which concerns on 1st thru | or 9th embodiment and the game machine which concerns on a 2nd specification example are connected.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

First Embodiment
First, a basic outline of a gaming system including the gaming display device 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, the gaming system according to the present embodiment is constructed in a game arcade such as a so-called pachinko parlor, and includes a display device 1 for gaming, a gaming machine 2, a gaming media lending device 3, and a server. It comprises the apparatus 4 and each is connected as shown to the same figure.

  In the present embodiment, although the card is described as an example of the “storage medium”, the present invention is not limited to this, and a coin, a token, etc. on which an IC chip or the like is mounted according to the present embodiment. It is intended to include all that is applicable to the invention.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it demonstrates using a banknote as an example of "money", it is not restricted to this, All things applicable to the invention which concerns on this embodiment, such as a banknote, a coin, a coin, etc. Shall be included.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when simply described as "card", a membership card to be lent to a player who is a member of the game arcade, and a counting card (visitor card) to be lent temporarily by the game arcade. Shall be included.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when simply described as "balls", it is assumed that both balls stored corresponding to the membership card and count balls stored corresponding to the counting card are included, When "ball-bearing information" is described, ball-bearing information (hereinafter referred to as "ball-holding information") indicating a ball is referred to as ball-bearing information (hereinafter referred to as "counted-ball information") indicating ball-counting. Shall be included. In addition, information indicating the amount of money inserted by the player is referred to as “money information” (or also referred to as “remaining amount information”), and “money information” is included in “ball information” when it is particularly indicated. There shall be cases. Further, it is assumed that the membership card can separately store the ball storage information, the counting ball information and the money information. Furthermore, for convenience of explanation, although the expression “ball” is usually used to indicate information on gaming balls held by the player, the present invention is not limited to this, and the player is not limited to this “ball”. It is assumed that the information on the held medals, the information on the game value held by the player by the electromagnetic method, and all the other similar information.

[Display device for game]
The gaming display device 1 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. The detailed configuration of the game display device 1 will be described later.

  The game display device 1 according to the present embodiment displays various game information as a projection image by means of a transmissive projector device, and is installed, for example, so as to be positioned above each game machine 2. As game information, the number of acquired game media (the number of acquired games or the number of acquired balls), the number of various games, the game history, and the like are displayed as graphs or numerical values (see FIG. 7). The gaming display device 1 is provided with a plurality of buttons 14A to 14F described later for the player to operate (see FIG. 7). The gaming display device 1 is connected to the gaming machine 2, the gaming media lending device 3, and the server device 4, and based on the input signal and the received signal, or on the basis of the operation of the player, It displays on the below-mentioned screen (projected part) 110A-110F. The gaming display device 1 may be installed in so-called gaming island units.

  The game display device 1 includes a projector main body 12 described later, a control unit (for example, a control unit 100 described later), and the like as electrical or optical components. The control unit controls the projector body 12 and performs communication control with the gaming machine 2, the gaming medium lending device 3 and the server device 4. The control unit controls the display on the screens 110A to 110F according to the operation when the operation of the buttons 14A to 14F is detected by the sensor. Although physical buttons 14A to 14F are provided in the present embodiment, for example, the screens 110A to 110F may be configured by a touch panel, and the control unit may detect an operation on the touch panel.

  Although not particularly shown, the gaming display device 1 includes an interface unit for communicating with the gaming machine 2, the gaming media lending device 3 and the server device 4. The interface unit and an external connection terminal board described later in the gaming machine 2 are connected by a contact input method, and communication can be made in one direction from the gaming machine 2 to the gaming display device 1. The interface unit and the gaming medium lending device 3 are connected, for example, by a harness in a contact output mode, and bidirectional communication is possible. The interface unit and the server device 4 are connected by a coaxial cable, for example, in a wired LAN system, and are connected by a harness, in a contact output system, so that bidirectional communication is possible. The connection method is not limited to these methods. For example, a wireless LAN method may be used for each connection, or an optical communication method using an optical cable may be used. Furthermore, these combined methods may be used.

[A game machine]
The gaming machine 2 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. As the gaming machine 2, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 2a or a pachislot gaming machine 2b is applied. In the following description, unless otherwise noted, the pachinko gaming machine 2a and the pachislot gaming machine 2b are collectively referred to as the gaming machine 2.

  The pachinko game machine 2a plays a game ball (game medium) on the board, and when a game ball which flows irregularly upon hitting a nail enters a specific winning opening, a game such as paying out a prize ball or adding a score. Mainly The pachinko gaming machine 2a is a main control unit for controlling a main game machine, a sub control unit for controlling a rendering operation related to display, voice output, etc., and a payout control for controlling a payout operation of a gaming ball as a winning ball. It has a unit etc. The payout control unit is connected to the game display device 1 via the external connection terminal board, and plays a game information signal, an error signal, etc. for each game or when the internal state changes. It outputs to the display device 1. Further, the payout control unit is connected to the game ball lending device 3a via the external connection terminal board, and outputs a lending request signal and a return request signal based on the operation of the player.

  The pachislot gaming machine 2b inserts a coin (gaming medium) and operates the start lever to rotate a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are drawn, and presses the stop button corresponding to each reel. By stopping the game sequentially, when the symbols corresponding to the predetermined combination are aligned on the activated line, the game of mainly paying out coins is performed. Similarly to the pachinko gaming machine 2a, the pachislot gaming machine 2b also controls a main control unit for controlling a main gaming machine, a sub control unit for controlling rendering operations relating to display, voice output, etc., and a coin dispensing operation. And the like. The payout control unit is connected to the game display device 1 via the external connection terminal board, and plays a game information signal, an error signal, etc. for each game or when the internal state changes. It outputs to the display device 1. The payout control unit is connected to the medal lending device 3b via the external connection terminal board, and outputs a lending request signal and a return request signal based on the operation of the player.

[Game media lending device]
The gaming medium lending device 3 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. The game medium lending device 3 includes a game ball lending device 3a installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 2a and a medal lending device 3b installed adjacent to the pachislot gaming machine 2b. In the following description, the gaming ball lending device 3a and the medal lending device 3b will be collectively referred to as the gaming media lending device 3 unless otherwise specified.

  The gaming medium lending device 3 is connected to the server device 4 via, for example, a switching hub or a controller (not shown). When a card is inserted by a player, the gaming medium lending device 3 is a server device identifying information (hereinafter simply referred to as "identifying information") such as a card ID or a member ID attached to an IC chip of the card. Send to 4 The server device 4 transmits, to the game medium lending device 3, ball-playing information of the player stored in association with the received identification information. Then, when there is a payout instruction from the player, the server device 4 updates the ball content information, and the gaming media lending device 3 drives a payout device (not shown) to execute payout control of gaming media. In addition, when a player inserts a bill, the server device 4 transmits balance information according to the amount of the bill (the charged amount). Then, when there is a payout instruction from the player, the server device 4 updates the remaining amount information, and the gaming media lending device 3 similarly executes payout control of gaming media.

  In addition, when the gaming medium is inserted into the counting device (not shown) directly by the operation of the player or from the gaming machine 2, the gaming medium lending device 3 counts the number of inserted gaming media, and the counting result is displayed. The game is transmitted to the server 4 as the player's ball-count information, and the server 4 stores the received ball-count information in association with the identification information added to the card. Further, when no card is inserted, it stores the received count ball information in association with the identification information previously added to the count card stored in the gaming medium lending device 3.

  In the present embodiment, although the server device 4 manages ball information and balance information of the player, the game medium lending device 3 may manage such information. In addition to the identification information being added to the card, a storage area may be provided, and the information may be stored in the storage area to manage the information. Then, the server device 4 or the game medium lending device 3 may update the information. Furthermore, the game medium lending device 3 or the server device 4 may manage the ball-bearing information, and the balance information may be directly stored in the storage area of the card.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when no card is inserted, the countable ball information and the balance information are correlated with the identification information previously added to the count card stored in the gaming medium lending device 3. Although stored, when there is a request for returning the card, the gaming media lending device 3 or the server device 4 newly adds identification information to the counting card stored in the gaming media lending device 3; The newly added identification information may be stored in association with the calculated ball-count information or the remaining amount information.

  In addition, when the gaming machine 2 is provided with a game ball connection device connection terminal board (hereinafter referred to as a “rental terminal board”), the gaming medium rental device 3 is also connected to the connection terminal board, Based on the receipt of the lending request signal, the return request signal, and the like output from the lending terminal board, transmission of a payout request signal to the gaming machine 2 and return of a card are performed.

  In addition, the gaming media lending device 3 is also connected to the gaming display device 1 via a converter or the like, and receives gaming information signals and error signals etc. output from the external connection terminal board provided in the gaming machine 2 At the same time, the player's ball-playing information is transmitted to the game display device 1.

[Server device]
The server device 4 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. The server device 4 is used as a so-called hall computer, and is connected not only to the game display device 1 but also to the game medium lending device 3. The server device 4 uses the game result management information (for example, withdrawal history information including the past several days, fraud detection information, etc.) to be managed, and information related to the game arcade (for example, new base information, vacant information, etc.) Transmit to the display device 1.

  In addition, the server device 4 is also connected to an external management device (not shown) managed by a center company which is a third party other than the game arcade, and identifies card identification information, member information, and player's balls information. Send regularly (eg, once a day). The external management device backs up each transmitted information. When the connection with the external management device is interrupted for a predetermined number of days (for example, 15 days), the server device 4 stops updating the ball-playing information of the player.

  In the gaming system as described above, when the player enters a game arcade (game arcade), the player first sits on a desired game machine 2 while viewing various information displayed on the game display device 1. Next, if the player is a member of the game arcade, the member card is inserted into the gaming medium lending device 3, and after identity verification (for example, input of a registered PIN number etc.), the server device 4 If the ball information is stored, the ball is used, and if the ball information is not stored, or if the ball information is the number of balls that the gaming machine 2 can not lend out, the bill is stored. , Making a lending request, receiving the lending of gaming media, and inserting gaming media into the gaming machine 2 to start gaming. Alternatively, if the player is not a member of the game arcade, a bill is inserted, a lending request is made, a gaming medium is loaned, and a gaming medium is inserted into the gaming machine 2 to start a game. At this time, the ball bearing information and the remaining amount information stored in the server device 4 are updated (subtracted) by the amount of the lent out.

  Then, in the case where the game is continued without being able to receive the payout of the game medium from the gaming machine 2, the ball possession information and the remaining amount information stored in the server device 4 are stored each time the lending request is made. , Will be sequentially updated (subtracted) by the amount that was lent out. On the other hand, if it is possible to receive the payout of gaming media from the gaming machine 2, when the paid gaming media is inserted into the gaming media lending device 3, the number of inserted gaming media is counted, and the counting result is Based on the ball content information stored in the server device 4 is updated (added).

  Thereafter, when the game in the gaming machine 2 is ended, the player makes a card return request. Here, if the membership card is inserted into the gaming medium lending device 3, the membership card is returned as it is after identity verification (for example, input of a registered personal identification number or the like). When the member card is not inserted into the gaming medium lending device 3, the game device 4 is stored in the case where count ball information is stored in the server device 4, or when there is remaining amount information. Return (issue) the counting card. If the counted ball information is not stored in the server device 4 and there is no remaining amount of the deposited money, the counting card is not returned (issued).

  When the counting card is returned (issued) and when it is desired to play a game with another gaming machine 2, the counting card is provided to the gaming medium lending device 3 provided corresponding to the other gaming machine 2. By inserting, the game can be started (replayed) in the same procedure as the membership card (except for the identification of the person). In the above case, the replay based on the ball information is referred to as "replay of balls", and the replay based on the ball-count information is referred to as "replay of balls".

[Configuration of Display Device for Games]
Next, the configuration of the game display device 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the game display device 1 includes a housing 10, a screen unit 11A, a projector main body (projection means) 12, a reflector 13, and an operation unit 14 as basic components. In addition to the projector body 12, the reflector 13 and the operation unit 14, the housing 10 accommodates a control unit (not shown) for controlling the operation of the entire game display device 1. The screen unit 11A is attached so as to cover the opening surface 10A provided on the front side of the housing 10. In the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 5A to 5C as an example, three types of replaceable screen units 11A to 11C are prepared. FIGS. 2 to 4 show a standard type screen unit 11A, and this screen unit 11A will be basically used and described unless otherwise specified, but any screen unit may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the case 10 is formed in a rectangular box shape so as to have a bottom surface 10a, side surfaces 10b and 10c on the left and right sides, a back surface 10d, an upper surface 10e, and an opening surface 10A on the front surface. The projector body 12 is installed at the rear of the bottom surface 10a, and the operation unit 14 is installed at the front of the bottom surface 10a. The reflector 13 is installed on the top of the back surface 10d.

  The screen unit 11A is formed to have a front portion 11a covering the opening surface 10A of the housing 10, and left and right side portions 11b and 11c detachably fixed to the side surfaces 10b and 10c of the housing 10 There is. The screen unit 11A has a screen (projected portion) 110A provided in the opening 11aa of the front portion 11a, and LED substrates 111 provided on the left and right sides on the rear surface of the front portion 11a, as shown in FIG.

  In the front portion 11a, in addition to the opening 11aa for disposing the screen 110A, a light emitting surface 111a emitting light on the left and right sides of the screen 110A and an opening 112 for exposing the buttons 14A to 14F of the operation unit 14 to the front. And are provided.

  The screen 110A is a transmissive type displayed by projecting a projection image from the rear, and is formed, for example, of a translucent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film as a main material, and is milky white when not projected It is translucent, or grayish. The screen 110A of the screen unit 11A is formed to have an even thickness over the entire surface. Such a screen 110A has a uniformly flat back side incident surface 1100 (FIG. 4) on which light projected from the projector main body 12 is incident, and a projected image by transmitting the light incident on the incident surface 1100. And a display surface 1101 (FIG. 3) on the front side on which the image is projected. The screens 110B and 110C of the other screen units 11B and 11C are formed so that the display surface 1101 is different while the incident surface 1100 is the same as the screen 110A of the screen unit 11A, which will be described later. .

  The light emission surface 111a is comprised by the plate-shaped member which has translucency, as shown to FIG. 3, FIG. 4. LED board 111 is provided in the back side. The LED substrate 111 is mounted with a plurality of LEDs (not shown), and is connected to the control unit on the housing 10 side via the connector 111A and the cable 111B. Although FIG. 4 shows the connector 111A and the cable 111B corresponding to one LED substrate 111, the other LED substrate 111 is also provided with a connector and a cable, and the other LED substrate 111 is also a connector. And connected to the control unit via a cable.

  The control unit causes a plurality of LEDs in the LED substrate 111 to be lit or blinked, and the light of these LEDs is emitted forward through the light emitting surface 111a. In addition, although the light emission part is not provided in the other screen units 11B and 11C, this is mentioned later.

  The light emitting surface 111a is formed of a light transmitting plate-like member, but is not limited to this, and at least a portion thereof is formed of a light transmitting member and a partially non-light transmitting member You may do so.

  In the light transmitting portion, the decorative sheet may be disposed between the LED substrate and the plate-like member, or the plate-like member itself may be provided with a light-transmitting colored decoration or the like. . In such a case, the LED substrate functions as a light emitting means having a light source, while the plate-like member functions as a decorative member to be decorated by the light emitting means, and as the decorative member, optically transmitted, diffused, Those having characteristics such as polarization, refraction, and reflection are applied.

  The projector main body 12 projects light for displaying information on a game as a projection image on a screen, and for example, a liquid crystal type using a liquid crystal panel or a DLP (Digital Micromirror Device) using a DMD (Digital Micromirror Device) The registered trademark: Digital Light Processing) is applied.

  The projector main body (projection means) 12 is connected to a control unit (not shown), and the operation is controlled by this control unit. The projector body 12 has an LED or lamp as a light source, a dichroic mirror, a projection lens, etc. in addition to the liquid crystal panel or DMD element. The projection lens is adjustable in the optical axis direction.

  The projector main body 12 is disposed such that the light emitted from the projection lens is directly directed to the reflector 13. When the screen units 11A to 11C are attached, focus adjustment can be performed by finely adjusting the projection lens of the projector main body 12 in the optical axis direction. As a result, it is possible to project a clear projected image correctly focused on any of the screens 110A to 110C of the screen units 11A to 11C.

  The reflector 13 is formed of a member that reflects light, and the opening surface thereof is reflected so as to reflect the light incident from the projector body 12 toward the opening surface 10A of the housing 10 (the incident surface 1100 of the screen 110A). It is installed on the back surface 10d in a posture inclined with respect to 10A.

  The operation unit 14 has a plurality of buttons 14A to 14F which can be operated by a player or the like side by side. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, the operation unit 14 is provided with a switch button 14A, a history button 14B, a call button 14C, a setting button 14D, a confirmation button 14E, and a cross button 14F in order from the left side. There is. The operation unit 14 is connected to a control unit (not shown), and when the operation of each button 14A to 14F is detected by a switch (not shown), a detection signal is supplied from the switch to the control unit. Perform display control according to the situation.

  The switching button 14A is a button for switching a graph display, a numerical value display and the like which will be described later. The history button 14B is a button for displaying today's game history. The call button 14C is a button for calling a store clerk at the game arcade. The setting button 14D is a button for changing display settings and the like. The confirmation button 14E is a button for confirming various settings. The cross button 14F is a button for performing numerical value change and scroll operation.

  5A to 5C show replaceable screen units 11A to 11C, and FIGS. 6A to 6C show display areas on the screens of the screen units 11A to 11C. The same or similar constituent elements in the screen units 11A to 11C are denoted by the same reference numerals. Although not particularly illustrated, the case 10 is applied to any of the screen units 11A to 11C.

  The screen unit 11A shown in FIG. 5A is the same as that shown in FIGS. The screen unit 11A is configured as a display surface 1101 in which the entire front surface side of the screen 110A is uniformly flat. As shown in FIG. 6A, the projected image V1 is projected on the central part of the display surface 1101, and the projected image V2 is projected on the left end when viewed from the front of the display surface 1101. The projected image V3 is projected to the right end when viewed from the front. In the screen 110A, as described above, the incident surface 1100 on the back side is uniformly flat.

  As illustrated in FIG. 7, a chart image is displayed as a line graph indicating the number of medals acquired from the start of the game as the projected image V1 on the screen 110A. As the projected image V2, a text image indicating the number of bonus games executed today and the number of accumulated games is displayed.

  As the projection image V3, a text image indicating the number of bonus times in the past and the cumulative number of games as a history is displayed. In addition, although it was set as the entrance plane 1100 about the field which light injects, as a field (display plane) on which light is projected, the back field area of LED board 111 and the field of the upper and lower sides of entrance plane 1100 (front part 11a etc.) Furthermore, the left and right regions (sides 11 b and 11 c) may be included.

  Thus, even if the plane on which light is projected is included inside the screen unit, it may be possible to project the projection image in a region in front of the projector body 12 or in front of the reflector 13.

  The screen unit 11B shown in FIG. 5B is configured as a display surface 1101 (hereinafter, the screen 110B will be referred to as a “first display surface 1101”) in which the front central portion of the screen 110B is uniformly flat. On the other hand, second display surfaces 1101B are formed on the front side left and right ends of the screen 110B.

  The second display surface 1101 B is formed to have a thickness in front of the first display surface 1101, thereby having a level difference with the first display surface 1101 and is partitioned in a rectangular shape. In the screen unit 11B of the present embodiment, no light emitting surface is provided, and instead, the second display surfaces 1101B on the left and right sides are disposed up to the region near the left and right ends of the screen unit 11B.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, the projection image V1 is projected on the first display surface 1101 of the screen 110B, and the projection image V2 is projected on the second display surface 1101B on the left side when the screen 110B is viewed from the front. The projected image V3 is projected on the second display surface 1101B on the right side when the screen 110B is viewed from the front.

  The projected images V1 to V3 basically have the same contents as the image shown in FIG. 7, but on the left and right second display surfaces 1101B, the projected image V2 includes, for example, a message image in addition to the text image. , V3 can be displayed. This will be described later.

  Although not particularly illustrated, an incident surface on which light projected from the projector main body 12 is incident is also formed on the back side corresponding to the first display surface 1101 and the second display surface 1101B on the screen 110B. The incident surface of such a screen 110B is also a uniformly flat surface.

  The screen unit 11C shown in FIG. 5C is configured as a display surface 1101 whose center on the front side of the screen 110C is uniformly flat (hereinafter, the screen 110C is also referred to as a “first display surface 1101”). On the other hand, second display surfaces 1101C are formed at the front side left and right ends of the screen 110C.

  The second display surface 1101 C is formed to have a thickness in front of the first display surface 1101, thereby having a level difference with the first display surface 1101, and is generally partitioned in a trapezoidal shape. The long sides 1101 Ca of the second display surface 1101 C are located near the left and right ends of the screen 110 C, and the short sides 1101 Cb of the second display surface 1101 C are located closer to the center than the left and right ends of the screen 110 C.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, the thickness W1 of the long side 1101Ca is larger than the thickness W2 of the short side 1101Cb, and the thickness gradually increases from the short side 1101Cb to the long side 1101Ca. It is getting bigger. The screen unit 11C is also not provided with a light emitting surface, and the second display surfaces 1101C on both the left and right sides are arranged with a sufficient size.

  As shown in FIG. 6C, the projected image V1 is projected on the first display surface 1101 of the screen 110C, and the projected image V2 is projected on the left second display surface 1101C when the screen 110C is viewed from the front. The projected image V3 is projected on the second display surface 1101C on the right side when the screen 110C is viewed from the front. The projected images V1 to V3 basically have the same contents as the image shown in FIG. Although not particularly illustrated, an incident surface on which light projected from the projector body 12 is incident is also formed on the back side of the screen 110C corresponding to the first display surface 1101 and the second display surface 1101C. The incident surface of such a screen 110C is also a uniformly flat surface.

[Display principle and appearance of screen]
Next, the display principle and the appearance of the screens 110A to 110C will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, as shown in FIG. 8, in the case of the screen 110 A, the light ray α projected from the projector main body 12 is reflected by the reflector 13 and then passes through the incident surface 1100 of the screen 110 A to reach the upper end of the display surface 1101. . Further, the light ray β projected from the projector main body 12 is reflected by the reflector 13 and then passes through the incident surface 1100 of the screen 110A to reach the lower end portion of the display surface 1101.

  Thus, as shown in FIG. 10 as a part of the screen 110A, projected images V1 to V3 (not shown for the projected image V3) showing various game information between the upper end and the lower end of the display surface 1101. Is displayed. On the left and right outside of the projected images V2 and V3 on both left and right sides, lighting and blinking of the LED according to the game state and the like are performed through the light emitting surface 111a (the light emitting surface 111a on the right is not shown).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9, also in the case of the screen 110C, the light ray α projected from the projector main body 12 is reflected by the reflector 13, and then transmitted through the incident surface 1100 of the screen 110C to be the first display surface 1101. Reach the top. Further, the light ray β projected from the projector main body 12 is reflected by the reflector 13 and then transmits through the incident surface 1100 of the screen 110C to reach the lower end portion of the first display surface 1101. As a result, as shown in FIG. 12, the projected image V1 is displayed on the first display surface 1101 in substantially the same manner as in FIG.

  On the other hand, near the short side portion 1101 Cb of the second display surface 1101 having a predetermined thickness W2 from the incident surface 1100, the arrival positions of the light rays α and β are displaced downward by h1 and h1 ', respectively, by refraction. Further, in the vicinity of the long side portion 1101 Ca of the second display surface 1101 having a predetermined thickness W1 larger than the thickness W2, the arrival positions of the light rays α and β are further displaced downward by h2 and h2 ′ respectively due to refraction.

  Thus, as shown in FIG. 12, unlike the case of FIG. 10, the second display surface 1101C is different from the case of FIG. (Not shown) is displayed.

  By the same display principle, as shown in FIG. 11, in the case of the screen 110B, the projected image V1 is displayed on the first display surface 1101 in substantially the same manner as in FIG. 10, while the second display surface 1101B The projected images V2 and V3 (not shown for the projected image V3) are displayed at positions shifted downward as compared with the case of FIG. The message image is also displayed as a projected image V2a on the second display surface 1101B of the screen 110B. In the screen 110B, the portion where the projected image V2a is displayed may be replaced with a light emitting surface 111a.

  Also, by replacing the screen unit 11A with the screen unit 11B (from the screen unit 11B to the screen unit 11A), a decoration function from the light emitting surface 111a to the display surface of the projected image V2a (from the display surface of the projected image V2a to the light emitting surface 111a) Can be switched.

  In short, in the game display device 1 according to the first embodiment, the projection distance from the projector body 12 to the incident surface 1100 of the screens 110A to 110C is constant in any screen unit 11A to 11C, and the projected images V1 to V3 The visual change of is caused only by the thickness and position of the screens 110A to 110C. Therefore, the function of adjusting or correcting the projection image according to the projection distance can be a simple function that is the minimum necessary or the function itself can be omitted. Thereby, the compatibility of the screen units 11A to 11C can be enhanced.

  According to such a game display device 1, the visual impressions of the projected images V2 and V3 on the display surfaces 1101 1101 B and 1101 C can be changed by replacing the screens 110A to 110C with the screen units 11A to 11C. For example, the display mode can be freely changed simply by replacing the screens 110A to 110C according to the layout of the game arcade or the design of the game machine, and the design and diversity of the display mode can be enhanced.

  Further, according to the game display device 1 to which the screen 110A shown in FIG. 10 is applied, the projection image V1 displayed on the display surface 1101 and the light emission mode of the light emission surface 111a are interlocked, or display and light emission are performed in the same pattern. In the light emitting surface 111a, since light emission display can be performed in a method completely different from display of a projected image, the designability and diversity of display modes can be further enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, although the distance from the projector main body 12 to the incident surface 1100 is constant as any of the screens 110A to 110C, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the distance may not be partially constant. It is good also as an entrance plane which has unevenness. That is, if there is a portion common to at least the incident surfaces of a plurality of screens, the optical path length from the projector main body becomes constant in the common portion, so that the projected image is changed only by changing the thickness of the portion And, in turn, the visual effects can be easily enhanced.

  Further, according to the gaming display device 1 to which the screens 110A to 110C shown in FIGS. 10 to 12 are respectively applied, the incident surface 1100 of any of the screens 110A to 110C is constituted by a uniform surface. Since the distance to 1100 becomes constant, the optical system such as the reflector 13 that forms the light path from the projector main body 12 to the incident surface 1100 can be simply configured, while the first display surface 1101 and the second display surface 1101 B , 1101 C, the visual effects can be easily enhanced by changing the visual impression of the projected images V 2 and V 3.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, according to the gaming display device 1, the projected images V2 on the display surfaces 1101, 1101 B, 1101 C can be obtained simply by replacing the screens 110 A to 110 C disposed in the opening surface 10 A of the housing 10. , V3 can be changed, so that the display form can be freely changed, and the design and diversity of the display form can be enhanced.

Second Embodiment
Next, a screen unit according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, about the component the same as that of 1st Embodiment mentioned above, or similar, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the screen unit 11A shown in FIG. 13, the LED substrate 111 is provided on the back side of each of the light emitting surfaces 111 a, and the LED substrate 111 is on the left side as viewed from the back. A relay substrate 113 is provided which is directly connected and connected to the other LED substrate 111 via a connection line 114.

  The relay substrate 113 is connected to the control unit on the housing 10 side via the cable 111B by a so-called B-to-B connection method. The connection line 114 bypasses the opening 11 aa from the relay substrate 113 and is connected to the other LED substrate 111. The connection line 114 is laid via the guide member 115 so as not to hang down to the incident surface 1100. The relay substrate 113 may be connected to the cable 111B through the connector 111A.

  A signal from the control unit is supplied to one of the LED substrates 111 via the cable 111 B and the relay substrate 113, and is also supplied to the other LED substrate 111 via the relay substrate 113 and the connection line 114. Thereby, the plurality of LEDs in both of the LED substrates 111 are lit or blinked, and the light of the LEDs is irradiated forward through the light emitting surface 111 a.

  According to such a configuration, since it is only necessary to connect the two LED substrates 111 and the control unit with one connection cable 111B, the connection operation when replacing the screen unit 11A can be performed more easily.

Third Embodiment
Next, a game display device according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, about the component the same as that of 1st Embodiment mentioned above, or similar, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the LED substrate 20 is provided on the side surface 10 b of the housing 10, and the movable decorative sheet 30 is disposed to face the LED substrate 20. A guide member 31 for supporting the upper end of the movable decorative sheet 30 in the front-rear direction so as to be able to be guided in the front-rear direction and a drive mechanism 32 for moving the movable decorative sheet 30 in the front-rear direction are provided at the top of the side surface 10b.

  The drive mechanism 32 is connected to a control unit provided in the housing 10, and the operation is controlled by the control unit. Although not illustrated in particular, the LED substrate 20, the movable decorative sheet 30, the guide member 31, and the drive mechanism 32 are also provided on the side surface 10c of the housing 10.

  In the side portions 11b and 11c of the screen unit 11A facing such side faces 10b and 10c, at least a region facing the LED substrate 20 is formed of a material having light transparency, preferably a transparent member. A fixed decorative sheet 40 is attached to the inner surface of the side portion 11b.

  Although not shown in particular, a fixed decorative sheet 40 is attached also to the inner surface of the side portion 11c. Here, although it is described that the area facing the LED substrate 20 is a material having light transparency, there is a side portion 11 b or a side portion 11 c at least a portion irradiated with the light of the LED provided on the LED substrate 20 If it exists, it will not specifically limit to the part which has light transmittance. Further, for example, even if the light emitting surface 111a has light transmissivity while the side portion 11b does not have light transmissivity, the light contrast of the light emitting surface 111a can be enhanced by guiding the light of the LED to the front side. it can.

  The movable decorative sheet 30 is formed of a flat rectangular light transmitting resin sheet. The movable decorative sheet 30 is provided with a plurality of light guide holes 30A corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 20A (see FIG. 16) in the LED substrate 20 and having an opening area to such an extent as to at least expose the LEDs 20A. The diameter of the light guide hole 30A is, for example, about 1 mm. The position distribution of the plurality of light guide holes 30A matches the position distribution of the plurality of LEDs 20A.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the movable decorative sheet 30 is moved in the front-rear direction along the guide member 31 by the operation of the drive mechanism 32. As a result, the light guide hole 30A does not directly guide the light of the LED 20A outward or does not lead the light of the LED 20A directly outward due to positional deviation (FIGS. 16A and 16B). reference).

  Similar to the movable decorative sheet 30, the fixed decorative sheet 40 is made of a flat rectangular light transmitting resin sheet, and characters, patterns, and the like are drawn on the surface for printing. The fixed decorative sheet 40 is also provided with a plurality of light guide holes 40A having an opening area similar to that of the light guide holes 30A. The diameter of the light guide hole 40A is, for example, about 1 mm, similarly to the light guide hole 30A.

  The position distribution of the plurality of light guide holes 40A matches the position distribution of the plurality of light guide holes 30A. That is, the plurality of light guide holes 40A in the fixed decorative sheet 40 match the positional distribution of the plurality of LEDs 20A, and the fixed decorative sheet 40 is attached to the position where the light guide holes 40A and the LEDs 20A face each other.

  Thus, as the movable decorative sheet 30 moves in the front-rear direction, the light guide hole 40A overlaps the light guide hole 30A to guide the light of the LED 20A directly outward, or the position with the light guide hole 30A. Due to the deviation, the light of the LED 20A is not directly led outward (see FIGS. 16A and 16B).

  Although the position distribution of the plurality of light guide holes 40A is assumed to match the position distribution of the plurality of light guide holes 30A, the present invention is not limited thereto, and at least one light guide hole 40A and one light guide hole 30A. The positions of and should match. When the position in this case matches, it means a position where at least the light of the LED can pass outward through the light guide hole, and it is not limited to a specific position.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, when the movable decorative sheet 30 is positioned so that at least a part of the LED 20A and the light guiding hole 30A overlap, the light guiding hole 30A is at least the light guiding hole 40A of the fixed decorative sheet 40. Overlap with some. In this case, the light of the LED 20A is led outward directly from the portion where the light guide hole 30A and the light guide hole 40A overlap. As a result, on the side surfaces 10 b and 10 c of the housing 10, characters, patterns and the like drawn on the fixed decorative sheet 40 can be viewed with relatively high illuminance and high contrast.

  On the other hand, as shown to FIG. 16 (B), when the movable decoration sheet 30 is positioned so that position deviation may be carried out from LED20A, without the light guide hole 30A overlapping with light guide hole 40A, the light of LED20A Of the light guide holes 30A, 40A of the light guide hole 30A. As a result, on the side surfaces 10 b and 10 c of the housing 10, characters, patterns and the like drawn on the fixed decorative sheet 40 can be viewed with relatively low illuminance and low contrast.

  According to the gaming display device 1 of the third embodiment, the light guide holes 30A, 30A move as the movable decorative sheet 30 moves from the position where the light guide holes 30A, 40A overlap to the position where they do not overlap. The overlapping portions of 40A gradually become smaller, and the light guided from the LED 20A to the side faces 10b and 10c through the light guide holes 30A and 40A gradually decreases.

  That is, the movable decorative sheet 30 is moved relative to the fixed decorative sheet 40 by a predetermined dimension which is equal to or larger than the diameter of the light guide holes 30A, 40A, and the illuminance according to the overlapping condition of both light guide holes 30A, 40A. Can be changed, so that the contrast of the image displayed by the facing decorative sheets 30 and 40 can be easily changed by adjusting the illuminance, and thus the visual effect can be easily enhanced.

  Further, according to the gaming display device 1 according to the third embodiment, since the LED substrate 20 and the drive mechanism 32 are provided on the housing 10 side, the screen unit 11A is compared with the one according to the fourth embodiment described later. Weight reduction and simplification can be achieved, and further, the labor of wiring can be omitted.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, a gaming display according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming display device 1 according to the fourth embodiment is different from that according to the third embodiment described above only in the positional relationship between the movable decoration sheet 30 and the fixed decoration sheet 40. Therefore, about the component the same as that of thing by 3rd Embodiment, or similar, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 17, in the gaming display 1 according to the fourth embodiment, a fixed decoration sheet 40 is disposed to face the LED substrate 20 provided on the side surface 10 b of the housing 10. On the other hand, a movable decorative sheet 30 is disposed on the side portion 11b of the screen unit 11A so as to face the fixed decorative sheet 40.

  A guide member 31 for supporting the upper end of the movable decorative sheet 30 in the front-rear direction so as to be able to be guided in the front-rear direction and a drive mechanism 32 for moving the movable decorative sheet 30 in the front-rear direction are provided at the top of the side portion 11b. The drive mechanism 32 is connected to a control unit provided in the housing 10 via a cable (not shown), and the operation is controlled by the control unit. Although not shown in particular, the LED substrate 20 and the fixed decoration sheet 40 are also provided on the side surface 10c of the housing 10, and the movable decoration sheet 30, the guide member 31 and the drive mechanism 32 are also provided on the side 11c of the screen unit 11A. It is done.

  The fixed decorative sheet 40 is fixed such that the plurality of light guide holes 40A coincide with the positional distribution of the plurality of LEDs 20A. On the other hand, characters, patterns and the like are drawn for printing on the surface of the movable decorative sheet 30, and such movable decorative sheet 30 is moved in the front-rear direction along the guide member 31 by the operation of the drive mechanism 32. , The light guide hole 30A overlaps with the light guide hole 40A, and the light of the LED 20A is not directly guided outward, or the positional deviation with the light guide hole 30A does not lead the light of the LED 20A directly outward. It becomes.

  That is, also by the gaming display device 1 according to the fourth embodiment, as the movable decorative sheet 30 moves from the overlapping position of the light guide holes 30A and 40A to the non-overlapping position, the light guide holes 30A and 40A communicate with each other. The overlapping portion of the light source gradually decreases, and the light guided from the LED 20A to the side surfaces 10b and 10c through the light guide holes 30A and 40A gradually decreases.

  Thus, the movable decorative sheet 30 is moved relative to the fixed decorative sheet 40 by a predetermined dimension which is equal to or greater than the diameter of the light guide holes 30A and 40A, depending on the overlapping state of the two light guide holes 30A and 40A. Since the illuminance can be changed, the contrast of the image displayed by the facing decorative sheets 30 and 40 can be easily changed by the illuminance adjustment, and thus the visual effect can be easily enhanced.

  Here, FIG. 18 shows an example in which the decorative sheets 30, 40 are applied to the pachinko gaming machine 2a, and FIG. 19 shows an example applied to the pachislot gaming machine 2b. In the pachinko gaming machine 2a and the pachislot gaming machine 2b, the movable decorative sheet 30 and the fixed decorative sheet 40 can be disposed behind the light transmitting decorative panels 50 and 51 provided on the front surface of the housing or the like. According to such a pachinko gaming machine 2a and the pachislot gaming machine 2b, the same operational effects as those of the gaming display device 1 shown in FIG. 14 or 17 can be obtained.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, a gaming display according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, about the component the same as that of the embodiment mentioned above, or similar, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the gaming display device 1 according to the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the entire front surface of the screen unit 11D is formed by the concave screen 110D, and the entire front surface side of the screen 110D is gently inclined. Is a concave display surface 1101. The light emitting surface and the button are omitted in the gaming display device 1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 21, an LED substrate 60 and a reflecting plate 61 are provided on the outside of the back surface 10 d of the housing 10 which is the back surface side of the reflector 13. A plurality of LEDs 60A are mounted on the LED substrate 60 so as to be positioned annularly with respect to the back surface 10d, and the LEDs 60A are arranged so that light can be emitted toward the reflecting plate 61. The light of such an LED 60A is reflected by the reflection plate 61 to illuminate the periphery of the game display device 1 and the peripheral portion of the screen 110A from behind.

  According to such a game display device 1, the projection image can be projected on the entire display surface 1101 of the screen 110D, and the same optical effect as that shown in FIG. 5A can be obtained. The decorative effect can be enhanced by the light from the rear by the LED 60A.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, since the screen 110D is formed in a concave shape, it is possible to display a stereoscopic image having a depth. This can further enhance the visual and decorative effects.

  In the gaming display 1 according to the first modification of the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22, the entire front surface of the screen unit 11E is formed by the screen 110E. The front side central portion of the screen 110E is configured as a concave first display surface 1101 having a gentle slope, while the front side left and right ends of the screen 110E have a thickness in front of the first display surface 1101. A concave second display surface 1101E is formed that partially protrudes outward from the left and right ends of the first display surface 1101.

  The second display surface 1101E has a step difference with the first display surface 1101 and is partitioned in a rectangular shape. According to such a game display device 1, the projection image can be projected by being divided into the first display surface 1101 and the second display surface 1101 E of the screen 110 E, and the one shown in FIG. The same effect can be obtained.

  In the gaming display device 1 according to the second modification of the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23, the front center portion of the screen unit 11F is constituted by the screen 110F, while the left and right end portions of the screen unit 11F are the screen 110F. And a light emitting surface 111a provided with a predetermined interval. The front side central portion of the screen 110F is configured as a concave first display surface 1101 having a gentle inclination, while the front side left and right ends of the screen 110F have a thickness in front of the first display surface 1101. A concave second display surface 1101 F is formed that partially protrudes outward from the left and right ends of the first display surface 1101.

  The second display surface 1101F and the first display surface 1101 have a level difference, and are generally divided in a trapezoidal shape. A light emitting surface 111 a is provided behind the second display surface 1101 F protruding from the left and right ends of the first display surface 1101. According to such a game display device 1, the projection image can be projected by being divided into the first display surface 1101 and the second display surface 1101 F of the screen 110 F, and the one shown in FIG. The same effect can be obtained. Further, since lighting and blinking of light can be visually recognized through the light emitting surface 111a, a display mode different from any of the above-described gaming display devices can be presented.

  Further, by making the second display surfaces 1101E and 1101F also concave, it is possible to display a stereoscopic image having a depth with the first display surface 1101. The second display surfaces 1101E and 1101F may be planar. The LED substrate 60 and the reflecting plate 61 can be omitted as appropriate.

Sixth Embodiment
Next, a game display device according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, about the component the same as that of the thing by the said embodiment, or similar, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the sixth embodiment, for example, the upper edge (upper side) of the screen 110A (FIG. 6A) of the screen unit 11A in the first embodiment emits light to improve visual effects and decorativeness.

  In the game display device 1 according to the sixth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24A, the rectangular screen 110A has a predetermined thickness and an incident surface (light guiding portion) 1100 for transmitting light, and the predetermined thickness And a display surface 1101 (display unit) for displaying a projection image. In addition, at least one substrate (LED substrate) 70 is installed on the bottom surface 10a of the housing 10 in the vicinity of the lower edge (lower side) of the screen 110A, and the screen 110A facing the lower edge (lower side) of the screen 110A. A irregular reflection portion 72 formed of an uneven portion or the like for irregularly reflecting light is provided on the upper edge (upper side) of the incident surface (light guide portion) 1100.

  At least one light emitting element (LED) 71 is mounted on the base 70, and the light from the light emitting element 71 is transmitted through the incident surface (light guiding portion) 1100 of the screen 110A to reach the irregular reflection portion 72, where it is irregularly reflected. Ru.

  The irregular reflection portion 72 is provided over the entire upper edge of the screen 110A. Also, the base 70 may be provided over the entire lower edge of the screen 110A, but may be provided separately as appropriate. Further, the arrangement position and the emission angle of the one or more light emitting elements 71 are appropriately adjusted so that the light from the light emitting elements 71 uniformly reaches the entire irregular reflection portion 72.

  In the sixth embodiment configured as described above, the light from the light emitting element 71 is transmitted through the incident surface (light guiding portion) 1100 of the screen 110A, reaches the irregular reflection portion 72, is irregularly reflected there, and is directed to the player It is irradiated. As a result, a laterally long reflected light that forms the upper edge of the screen 110A is formed, and visual effects and decorative effects can be improved. In addition, a light shielding member may be provided on the housing 10 side of the irregular reflection portion 72 so that the diffusely reflected light does not go toward the inside of the housing 10 (not shown).

  By the way, not all of the light from the light emitting element 71 is directed to the irregular reflection portion 72 as shown in FIG. 24B, but a part of the light leaks from the gap between the base 70 and the bottom surface 10a. While the irradiation efficiency is lowered, the leaked light may be scattered into the housing 10 to lower the brightness and resolution of the image from the projector main body 12.

  Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the light shielding member 73 is installed in the gap to prevent the leakage of light to the housing 10. The light shielding member 73 is an elongated strip-like thin plate, and is fixed to the lower edge of the screen 110A and the end of the bottom surface 10a by, for example, bonding. The material of the light shielding member 73 may be any material such as metal or resin as long as it has a light shielding function, but in consideration of workability, a material having flexibility is desirable.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 24B, a light shielding member 74 may be appropriately provided around the light emitting element 71 so that the light from the light emitting element 71 does not face the display surface (display portion) 1101 of the screen 110A. .

  Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, an example in which the irregular reflection member 72 is provided on the upper edge (upper side) of the incident surface (light guide portion) 1100 of the screen 110A has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. It may be provided in the screen unit 11A (not shown).

  Further, it goes without saying that the light emitting means according to the sixth embodiment can be applied to the screen units 11B and 11C described in the first embodiment.

  According to the sixth embodiment, the light from the light emitting elements 71 of the base 70 provided in the vicinity of the lower edge of the screen 110A causes the upper edge of the screen 110A to emit light, thereby displaying the game display device 1 can improve the visual effect and decoration. Moreover, by preventing the generation of the leaked light from the light emitting element 71 to the inside of the housing 10, the irradiation efficiency is enhanced, and the projection image on the screen 110A is not affected. The base 70 is provided in the vicinity of the upper edge, the left edge and / or the right edge of the screen 110A, and the irregular reflection portion 72 is opposed to each other at the lower edge of the incident surface (light guide portion) 1100, the right It may be provided at the edge and / or the left edge. Thereby, each edge (upper edge, lower edge, right edge and / or left edge) of the screen 110A can be lit appropriately.

  (Modification 1) In Modification 1, as shown in FIG. 25, in order to prevent light leakage to the housing 10, a thin-plate shaped light shielding member of a predetermined height is provided on the housing 10 side of the base 70. (Sidewall) 75 is provided. Thereby, the same operation and effect as those of the sixth embodiment can be achieved.

  (Modification 2) In the modification 2, as shown in FIG. 26, the base 70 having a light shielding function is disposed in the vertical direction, and the light from the light emitting element leaks into the inside of the housing 10 by the base 70 itself. To prevent. Thus, the same function and effect as those of the sixth embodiment can be obtained, and the number of parts can be reduced.

Seventh Embodiment
Next, a game display device according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, about the component the same as that of the thing by the said embodiment, or similar, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the seventh embodiment, for example, by making the upper edge portion of the concave screen 110D shown in FIG. 18 emit light, the visual effect and the decorativeness are improved.

  In the gaming display device 1 according to the seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, the screen 110D has a predetermined thickness, an incident surface 1100 (light guiding portion) which transmits light, and a projected image having a predetermined thickness. It is comprised from the display surface 1101 (display part) to display. Further, at least one substrate (LED substrate) 70 is installed on the bottom surface 10a of the housing 10 in the vicinity of the lower edge of the screen 110D, and light is applied to the upper edge of the incident surface (light guide portion) 1100 of the screen 110D. The irregular reflection portion 72 formed of an uneven portion or the like to be irregularly reflected is provided.

  The irregular reflection portion 72 is provided over the entire upper edge of the screen 110D, as in the sixth embodiment. Also, the base 70 may be provided over the entire lower edge of the screen 110D, but may be provided separately as appropriate. In addition, the arrangement position and the emission angle of the one or more light emitting elements 71 are appropriately adjusted so that the light from the light emitting elements uniformly reaches the entire irregular reflection portion 72.

  As a result, a laterally long reflected light that forms the upper edge of the screen 110D can be formed, and visual effects and decorative effects can be improved. Although the LED substrate 60 and the reflection plate 61 are provided on the back surface of the reflector 13 in the drawing shown in FIG. 25, these can be omitted as appropriate.

  In addition, in order to prevent the light from the light emitting element 71 from leaking through the gap between the base 70 and the bottom surface 10 a, the light shielding member 73 is installed in the gap to prevent the light from leaking to the housing 10.

  Furthermore, a light shielding member may be provided appropriately around the light emitting element 71 so that the light from the light emitting element 71 does not face the display surface 1101 of the screen 110D (see FIG. 24B).

  According to the seventh embodiment, as in the sixth embodiment, the light from the light emitting element 71 of the base 70 provided in the vicinity of the lower edge of the screen 110D causes the upper edge of the screen 110D to be bordered. By emitting light, the visual effect and decoration of the game display device 1 can be improved. Moreover, by preventing the generation of the leaked light from the light emitting element 71 to the inside of the housing 10, the irradiation efficiency is enhanced, and the projection image on the screen 110D is not affected. Further, as in the sixth embodiment, the base 70 is provided in the vicinity of the upper edge, the left edge and / or the right edge of the screen 110D, and the irregular reflection portions 72 are opposed to each other to be incident surfaces (light guide portions ) The lower edge, right edge and / or left edge of the 1100 may be provided. Thereby, each edge (upper edge, lower edge, right edge and / or left edge) of the screen 110D can be appropriately illuminated.

  (Modification 1) In Modification 1, as shown in FIG. 28, in order to prevent light from the light emitting element 71 from leaking into the housing 10 from the gap between the base 70 and the bottom surface 10a, it has a light shielding function. The bottom surface 10a is deformed to close the gap. Thus, the same function and effect as those of the seventh embodiment can be obtained, and the number of parts can be reduced.

  (Modification 2) In the modification 2, as shown in FIG. 29, the base 70 having a light shielding function is disposed in the vertical direction, and light from the light emitting element leaks into the inside of the housing 10 by the base 70 itself. To prevent. Thus, the same operation and effect as those of the seventh embodiment can be achieved, and the number of parts can be reduced.

  Also in the first and second modifications, the LED substrate 60 and the reflection plate 61 can be omitted as appropriate.

Eighth Embodiment
Next, a gaming apparatus according to an eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIGS. 30 to 36. FIG. In addition, about the component the same as that of the thing by the said embodiment, or similar, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 30 is a perspective view of the game apparatus G1 according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 30, the gaming apparatus G1 has a case G10 and a screen unit G11 configured by a screen G110 whose entire front surface is concave. The housing G10 has a base G101 and a projector housing G102.

  FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the game apparatus G1. As shown in FIG. 31, the base G101 has a flat plate-like back surface portion G101a and a bottom surface portion G101b, and constitutes the back surface wall and the bottom surface wall of the housing G10, respectively. The projector main body 12 is attached to the bottom surface portion G101b so as to be mounted. In addition, the reflector 13 is disposed along the inner wall of the back surface portion G101a.

  The projector housing G102 is attached to the bottom portion G101b so as to cover the projector main body 12, and thereby accommodates the projector main body 12 in the internal space. The upper part of the internal space is opened, and the image light emitted from the projector main body 12 can reach the reflector 13 disposed on the back surface portion G101a. The screen unit G11 is attached so as to cover the reflector 13, and is configured such that the image light reflected by the reflector 13 is irradiated to the screen G110.

  Thus, the gaming machine G1 of the eighth embodiment is a gaming display device that functions as a transmissive projector device as in the above-described embodiment, but is not limited to this. For example, the gaming device may be a gaming display device in which a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) is incorporated. Further, the gaming apparatus is not limited to the gaming display apparatus, and may be, for example, a gaming medium lending apparatus, or a gaming machine decoration unit provided in a gaming machine.

  In the following description of the eighth embodiment, for convenience, a direction perpendicular to the main surface of the back surface portion G101a may be referred to as the front-rear direction. The screen unit G11 side of the back surface portion G101a in the front-rear direction may be referred to as the front side (front direction) of the gaming apparatus G1, and the side opposite to the front side may be referred to as the rear side (rear direction, depth direction). The right side and the left side may be referred to as the right side (right direction) and the left side (left direction) of the gaming apparatus G1 as viewed from the front side, and the direction including the right side and the left side may be referred to as the left and right direction. Furthermore, a direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction and the left-right direction may be referred to as a vertical direction or a height direction.

  FIG. 32 is a perspective view showing the gaming apparatus G1 from the back side. As shown in FIGS. 30 to 32, on the rear side of the back surface portion G101a in the base G101, a light guide plate G61 is disposed parallel to the back surface portion G101a. That is, the light guide plate G61 is disposed in parallel with the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. The light guide plate G61 has translucency, and can guide incident light. In the eighth embodiment, the light guide plate G61 is formed in a substantially rectangular flat plate, but is not limited to this and may be any shape such as a circle. As shown in FIG. 32, the light guide plate G61 is fixed to the base G101 by the back substrate cover G62.

  The gaming apparatus G1 is generally disposed above the gaming machine 2 and disposed so that the screen G110 faces the player's face with the screen G110 directed downward from the front. Be done. At this time, it is preferable that the light guide plate G61 be configured in such a position and / or size that the light guide plate G61 can be seen above the screen G110 from the player.

  FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view showing the gaming apparatus G1 from the back side. As shown in FIG. 33, the light guide plate G61 has an annular opening G61a formed to penetrate in the thickness direction. That is, the light guide plate G61 has an annular end face (opening side end face G61b) on the opening G61a side. In other words, the opening side end face G61b forms the opening G61a of the light guide plate G61. In the eighth embodiment, the opening G61a is formed in an annular shape, but is not limited to this, and may be square or the like. In addition, a part of the periphery of the opening G61a may be aligned with the periphery of the light guide plate G61. That is, a notch may be provided in the light guide plate G61 to form the opening G61a.

  The LED substrate G60 is disposed so as to be sandwiched between the light guide plate G61 and the base G101. That is, the plurality of LEDGs 60A are provided on the LED substrate G60 separate from the light guide plate G61. The LED substrate G60 has a plurality of LEDGs 60A mounted at positions facing the opening-side end surface G61b on the light guide plate G61 side. More specifically, in the LED substrate G60, the plurality of LEDGs 60A are arranged in parallel at equal intervals so as to surround the openings G61a along the opening side end face G61b. When the opening G61a is formed by a notch, the plurality of LEDs G 60A are arranged in an arc along the notch. Each LEDG 60A has an emission port in the opposite direction to the opening side end face G61b. Accordingly, the LED substrate G60 radiates light radially from the plurality of LEDs G60A toward the opening-side end surface G61b of the light guide plate G61. The optical axes of the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs G60A are parallel to the light guide plate G61, and the light incident on the light guide plate G61 travels in the light guide plate G61 to form the peripheral edge of the light guide plate G61. It is made reachable to the outer end face G61c. The thickness of the light guide plate G61 is set to be longer than the length in the front-rear direction of the LED G 60A. Thus, the back substrate cover G62 for fixing the light guide plate G61 is prevented from coming into contact with the LED G60A located in the opening G61a of the light guide plate G61.

  Thus, the light from the plurality of LEDs G60A disposed in the opening G61a of the light guide plate G61 enters the light guide plate G61 after being incident from the opening side end face G61b of the light guide plate G61, and is outside the light guide plate G61 It illuminates so that the whole field of end face G61c may be covered. As a result, the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs G60A spreads radially in the light guide plate G61 and reaches the outer end face G61 c, so that the entire periphery of the light guide plate G61 can be illuminated annularly, and the game apparatus G1 The light guide plate G61 illuminated from any direction can be visually recognized, and the identifiability of a gaming machine or the like to which the gaming apparatus G1 is attached can be improved.

  The LED board G60 is capable of individually controlling the lighting of the plurality of LEDs G60A. The LED substrate G60 has a memory (not shown) in which a plurality of lighting patterns are stored, and controls the plurality of LEDs G 60A in a lighting pattern according to an external signal or the like. For example, the LED board G60 selects a lighting pattern according to an operation performed on a signal indicating the gaming state transmitted from the gaming machine or an input device (not shown) of the gaming apparatus G1 and The plurality of LEDs G 60A are controlled based on the lighting pattern. For example, by controlling the plurality of LEDs G 60A according to the lighting pattern in which the plurality of LEDs G 60A are sequentially lighted in the order of arrangement, it is possible to perform a drive effect that light flows in the peripheral edge of the light guide plate G61. In addition, by selecting a full color LED for the plurality of LEDG 60A, red lights up when a call input from the player is performed by operation of a touch sensor described later, etc., and yellow flashes when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine. And so on.

  In the light guide plate G61, reflection processing for reflecting a part of the light from the LED G 60A in the light guide plate G61 in the thickness direction on the side of the base G101 is performed at a plurality of places. In the light guide plate G61, the reflection processing is performed so as to form a shape having designability, so that the illumination of the shape appears on the main surface of the light guide plate G61. Hereinafter, the reflection processing of the light guide plate G61 will be specifically described with reference to an optical path pattern of light traveling in the light guide plate G61.

  34A and 34B are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an optical path pattern of light from the LED G 60A traveling through the light guide plate G61. As shown in FIG. 34A, when the light path of the light from the LED G 60A is not subjected to reflection processing, the light emitted from the LED G 60A is incident on the light guide plate G61 from the opening side end face G61 b, and the surface direction in the light guide plate G61 It travels in the (vertical direction) to reach the outer end face G61c. Thus, the entire periphery of the light guide plate G61 is annularly illuminated.

  On the other hand, as shown to FIG. 34B, the light-guide plate G61 has the reflection part G61d which reflects the light which travels in the surface direction (up-down direction) of the light-guide plate G61. In the eighth embodiment, the reflection portion G61d is a recess formed on the main surface of the light guide plate G61 on the opposite side to the LED substrate G60. The reflecting portion G61d has a reflecting surface whose normal is inclined 45 degrees in the thickness direction (forward direction) with respect to the light path of the light from the LED G60A, and the light reaching the reflecting portion G61d corresponds to the thickness direction of the light guide plate G61 (Direction) to the side of the LED substrate G60. The reflecting portion G61d may be provided inside the light guide plate by processing such as laser processing.

  FIG. 35 is an explanatory view showing an example of the illumination mode of the light guide plate G61. As shown in FIG. 35, light is radially emitted from the LED G 60A (see FIG. 33) disposed in the opening G61a, reaches the outer end face G61c, and illuminates the peripheral edge of the light guide plate G61. Further, part of the light from the LED G 60A (see FIG. 33) is reflected in the front direction by the reflecting portion G61 d to form a bright spot on the main surface of the light guide plate G61. The reflective portions G61d are collectively provided so as to form a design, and the bright spots formed by the reflection of the reflective portion G61d stipples the design.

  FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view showing the gaming apparatus G1 from the back side. As shown in FIG. 36, the plurality of LEDs G 60A are provided on an LED substrate G60 separate from the light guide plate G61. The LED board G60 and the light guide plate G61 have alignment portions G60e and G61e for aligning so that the plurality of LEDs G60A are disposed at positions facing the opening-side end face G61b of the light guide plate G61, respectively. Each is provided.

  Specifically, the alignment portion G60e is four through holes provided in the front-rear direction and provided at the four corner portions of the light guide plate G61. The alignment portion G61e is four through holes corresponding to the four alignment portions G60e. In addition, the alignment part G62e is similarly formed also in back board | substrate cover G62 which clamps the light-guide plate G61 by LED board G60.

  The rear surface portion G101a of the base G101 is provided with an alignment member G101e for performing alignment in cooperation with the alignment portions G60e and G61e of the LED substrate G60 and the light guide plate G61. The alignment member G101e has a cylindrical shape having a cross section engaged with the alignment portions G60e, G61e, and G62e, and is longer than the total thickness of the LED substrate G60, the light guide plate G61, and the back substrate cover G62. It protrudes in the back direction from the base | substrate G101, and is provided.

  As described above, the LED substrate G60, the light guide plate G61, and the back substrate cover G62 are detachably disposed on the base G101. The alignment portions G60e, G61e, and G62e of the LED substrate G60, the light guide plate G61, and the back substrate cover G62 are sequentially inserted into the alignment member G101e of the base G101 to perform alignment.

  When the light guide plate G61 is aligned, first, the alignment portion G61e of the light guide plate G61 is aligned with and inserted into the protruding end portion of the alignment member G101e of the base G101. Then, the light guide plate G61 is moved forward while the movement in the vertical direction and the lateral direction is restricted by the alignment member G101e, and the light guide plate G61 is placed on the LED substrate G60. Thus, the light guide plate G61 is restricted only by the movement in the front-rear direction by the alignment member G101e. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the light guide plate G61 from coming into contact with the LED G60A provided to be placed on the LED substrate G60 at the time of alignment.

(Outline of the eighth embodiment)
As described above, the gaming apparatus G1 of the eighth embodiment is a light guiding plate which is detachably disposed on the base G101 and has a light transmitting property formed such that the opening side end face G61b having a predetermined shape penetrates in the thickness direction. G61 and a plurality of LEDs G60A disposed at positions facing the opening side end face G61b forming the opening G61a of the light guide plate G61, and the plurality of LEDs G60A are provided in parallel along the opening side end face G61b Are arranged so that the light guide plate G61 reflects a portion of the light guided from the plurality of LEDs G 60A into the light guide plate G61 via the opening-side end face G61 b in the thickness direction of the light guide plate G61. A reflective portion G61d is formed.

  According to the above configuration, the light from the plurality of LEDs G60A disposed in the opening of the light guide plate G61 is guided from the inside of the light guide plate G61 after being incident from the opening side end face G61b of the light guide plate G61, and the light guide plate G61 It illuminates so that the whole field of outside end face G61c of may be covered. On the other hand, a part of the light guided in the light guide plate G61 by the reflection process performed on the light guide plate G61 is emitted from the surface of the light guide plate G61 by the reflecting portion G61 d subjected to the reflection process. As a result, the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs G60A spreads radially in the light guide plate G61 and reaches the outer end face G61 c, so that the entire periphery of the light guide plate G61 can be illuminated annularly, and the game apparatus G1 The light guide plate G61 illuminated from any direction can be visually recognized, and the identifiability of the gaming machine to which the gaming apparatus G1 is attached can be improved. Furthermore, the designability can be improved by the light emitted from the surface of the light guide plate G61, and since the light guide plate G61 is detachable from the base G101, the light guide plate G61 is replaced with a light guide plate G61 subjected to reflection processing of a different design. Since this is possible, it becomes possible to apply the gaming machine G1 to various types of gaming machines.

  Further, in the gaming apparatus G1 of the eighth embodiment, the plurality of LEDs G60A are provided on the LED substrate G60 separate from the light guide plate G61, and the LED substrates G60 and the light guide plate G61 Positioning portions G60e and G61e for positioning are provided so as to be disposed at positions respectively facing the opening side end face G61b of the light plate G61.

  According to the above configuration, the arrangement of the light guide plate G61 disposed in a detachable manner is determined by the alignment portions G60e and G61e such that the plurality of LEDs G60A are positioned to face the opening side end face G61b of the light guide plate G61. Ru. As a result, since the alignment is accurately performed by the alignment units G60e and G61e, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the visual effect due to the misalignment.

  Further, in the gaming machine G1 according to the eighth embodiment, the base G101 is provided with an alignment member G101e which performs alignment in cooperation with the alignment parts G60e and G61e of the LED substrate G60 and the light guide plate G61. ing.

  According to the above configuration, the alignment portions G60e and G61e of the LED substrate G60 and the light guide plate G61 cooperate with the alignment member G101e provided on the base G101 to perform alignment. As a result, the LED substrate G60 and the light guide plate G61 are aligned, and are also aligned with the base G101, so that it is possible to prevent a reduction in visual effects due to misalignment.

  Further, in the gaming machine G1 of the eighth embodiment, the shape of the opening G61a is annular, and the plurality of LEDs G60A are annularly disposed along the opening-side end face G61b of the annular opening G61a.

  According to the above configuration, the plurality of LEDGs 60A are annularly arranged along the opening-side end face G61b of the annularly formed opening G61a. Thus, the plurality of LEDs G60A are annularly arranged along the opening-side end face G61b of the light guide plate G61, thereby minimizing the number of the LED G60A and further increasing the efficiency of the light of the plurality of LED G60A with respect to the light guide plate G61. As a result, it is possible to cause the outer end surface G61c of the light guide plate G61 to emit light more effectively.

The Ninth Embodiment
Next, a gaming apparatus according to a ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, about the component the same as that of the thing by the said embodiment, or similar, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted. In the ninth embodiment, different aspects of the projector housing G102 (see FIGS. 31 and 32) described in the eighth embodiment will be described, and the other configurations and the like are the same as those in the eighth embodiment and thus the description thereof is omitted. Do.

  FIG. 37 is a perspective view of a projector housing F102 of the game apparatus F1 according to the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 37, the projector housing F102 is attached to the base G101 so as to cover the projector main body 12 (see FIG. 31) below the screen unit G11, thereby accommodating the projector main body 12 in the internal space. As in the eighth embodiment, the upper part of the internal space is opened, and the image light emitted from the projector main body 12 can reach the reflector 13 disposed on the back face portion G101a. Furthermore, the projector housing F102 of the ninth embodiment has a function of an input device for receiving an input from the player and a function of notifying the player. Hereinafter, the projector housing F102 will be specifically described.

  The projector housing F102 has an exterior panel F1021 that forms the front outline of the projector housing F102. The exterior panel F1021 includes a touch area F1021a, a speaker unit F1021c, and a light receiving unit F1021d.

  The touch area F1021a is a rectangular input area set according to the shape of a touch sensor F1022 (see FIG. 38) described later. The touch area F1021a is provided with a light transmitting portion F1021b having a light transmitting property, and light transmitted from the back side can be transmitted. In the ninth embodiment, the light transmitting portion F1021b includes a rectangular design indicating the touch area F1021a, and a pattern indicating “hand” and text indicating “CALL” arranged in the rectangular design. It is not limited to. In the ninth embodiment, the exterior panel F1021 is formed of a translucent material, and non-transmissive ink is printed so as to leave the translucent portion F1021b. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a translucent material may be provided and formed so as to be flush with the exterior panel F1021, or it may be a through hole that simply penetrates the exterior panel F1021. In addition, the light transmitting portion F1021b may be provided with an optical sheet (optical film) for irregularly reflecting light on the back side after forming a through hole penetrating the exterior panel F1021.

  The speaker unit F1021c is a through hole for outputting the sound from a speaker F10253 (see FIGS. 38 and 39) to be described later to the outside. The light receiving unit F1021d is an input device for receiving a signal from the outside such as infrared light.

  FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the projector housing F102. As shown in FIG. 38, the projector housing F102 includes the exterior panel F1021, the touch sensor F1022, the light guide plate F1023, the LED array F1024 provided on the upper edge of the light guide plate F1023, the substrate F1025, and the frame It has a body F1026 and a containing base F1027.

  The housing base F1027 forms the outer shape of the projector housing F102 together with the exterior panel F1021, and houses the touch sensor F1022, the light guide plate F1023, the LED array F1024, and the substrate F1025 with the exterior panel F1021. Further, the housing base F1027 is provided with the above-described speaker and light receiving element for the light receiving unit F1021d to receive an optical signal from the outside. The projector main body 12 (see FIG. 31) is accommodated on the opposite side of the accommodation base F1027 from the exterior panel F1021. Further, the housing base F1027 is provided with a speaker F10253 for outputting sound from the speaker unit F1021c at the upper left portion on the front side.

  The substrate F1025 has a function of receiving an input from the touch sensor F1022 or the light receiving unit F1021d, and a function of controlling lighting of the LED array F1024.

  The LED array F 1024 is an LED unit in which a plurality of full color LEDs are arranged in parallel, and emits planar light from the upper edge of the light guide plate F 1023 toward the light guide plate F 1023. The light guide plate F1023 is provided on the back side of the touch sensor F1022 and travels while reflecting the light from the LED array F1024 by the reflection sheet provided on the rear surface side of the light guide plate F1023 and is provided on the front side of the light guide plate F1023. The surface light is emitted from the diffusion sheet. That is, the light guide plate F1023 has a function of guiding the light from the LED array F1024 toward the light transmitting part F1021b of the exterior panel F1021 provided on the front side through the touch sensor F1022. Thereby, the translucent part F1021b which has translucency is illuminated.

  The touch sensor F1022 has translucency, and is disposed on the back side of the exterior panel F1021 in association with the touch area F1021a. Thereby, the touch sensor F1022 can detect a touch input to the touch area F1021a by the player.

  The touch sensor F1022, the light guide plate F1023 in which the LED array F1024 is disposed, and the substrate F1025 are attached to the frame F1026 and attached to the central portion of the housing base F1027 on the exterior panel F1021 side.

  FIG. 39 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the projector housing F102. As shown in FIG. 39, the substrate F1025 has a control circuit F10250, a ROM F10251, a RAM F10252, and a communication interface F10254. The control circuit F10250 includes a CPU, and a circuit for controlling the LED array F1024 and the speaker F10253. The ROM F 10251 stores a lighting pattern and the like for lighting control of the LED array. The RAM F 10252 temporarily stores input information and the like from the outside. The communication interface F10254 is for communicating with, for example, the LED board G60 (see FIG. 33) as well as the gaming machine 2 (see FIG. 1). Communication from the gaming machine 2 may be performed via the LED board G60 or a control board (not shown) that controls the LED board G60. Further, instead of directly receiving a signal from the gaming machine, the signal may be indirectly received from another device, for example, a server or a controller in the game arcade.

  As described above, the substrate F1025 is configured to be able to change the illumination of the light transmitting unit F1021b based on the information from the touch sensor F1022 or the gaming machine 2. In addition, because it is connected to the LED board G60 for illuminating the light guide plate G61 disposed on the back of the game apparatus G1, for example, the illumination of the light transmitting portion F1021b and the illumination of the light guide plate G61 are synchronized It is possible to perform various effects and notifications.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart of control processing executed by the control circuit F10250. The operation of control circuit F10250 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 40, first, the control circuit F10250 determines whether or not there is an input (S1). The input includes an input to the touch sensor F 1022 by the player, and an input of a signal indicating the gaming state from the gaming machine 2. If there is no input (S1: NO), step S1 is executed again. There may be control processing when there is no input. For example, as long as there is no input to the touch sensor F1022, illumination of the light transmitting unit F1021b (LED array F1024) in a predetermined manner may be continued.

  When there is an input (S1: YES), the control circuit F10250 determines an input type (S2). Thereafter, the control circuit F10250 determines a control target (S3). That is, the control circuit F10250 selects an actuator to be controlled according to the input type. The actuator includes an LED array F1024, a speaker F10253, and a plurality of LEDGs 60A of the LED substrate G60. That is, the ROM F 10251 stores a data table in which an actuator to be controlled is associated according to the input type, and the control circuit F 10250 refers to the data table to acquire an actuator corresponding to the input type.

  Then, the control circuit F10250 selects a control pattern which defines in advance how to control the actuator (S4). That is, the ROM F 10251 stores a data table associated with the control pattern of the actuator corresponding to the input type, and the control circuit F 10250 refers to the data table to obtain the control pattern for each actuator.

  Thereafter, the control circuit F10250 controls the actuator according to the selected control pattern (S5), and ends the process. Specifically, when there is an input from the player to the touch sensor F1022, control is performed to change the illumination mode of the light transmitting unit F1021b (LED array F1024) into a predetermined pattern. When the plurality of LEDs G 60A are controlled according to the input to the touch sensor F 1022, the control circuit F 10250 transmits a control signal to the LED board G 60 or a control board for controlling the LED board G 60 Control the LEDG60A.

  Further, when the player performs a touch operation, the control circuit F10250 emits the LED G60A in a predetermined mode with respect to the above-mentioned LED substrate G60 and / or the projector control means, and / or displays a predetermined image on the screen G110. You may be instructed to When the control circuit F10250 instructs the LED substrate G60 to emit light, the light guide plate G61 larger than the main body visible from the side of the gaming machine as well as the light transmitting portion F1021b and the screen G110 of the touch area F1021a in front of the player Is turned on in a predetermined mode (for example, red light), the administrator of the game arcade specifies the called gaming machine (the gaming machine to which the gaming apparatus G1 to which the call input has been performed by the player is attached) It will be easier. In addition, the game arcade manager operates the touch sensor F1022 (touch area F1021a) to turn off the light when arriving at the called gaming machine, but according to the time from the touch operation on the LED board F1025 side The lighting mode may be changed. For example, the control circuit F10250 turns on the LED G 60A at the timing when the player's operation is performed, changes it to blink red after 30 seconds from the player's operation timing, and one minute passes from the player's operation timing. From then on, it may be controlled to change to a red blink faster than before. Thereby, even if the game arcade manager is at a position away from the gaming machine, the time from the timing when the player operates can be determined at a glance, and even if there are a plurality of gaming machines being called, the corresponding priority It becomes possible to provide appropriate services to the player by making it possible to

  Thus, the control circuit F10250 performs control to change the lighting mode of the LED G60A, which is a plurality of light sources for the light guide plate G61, when there is a touch input to the touch area F1021a. The control circuit F10250 also performs control to change the lighting mode of the plurality of LEDs G 60A according to the elapsed time from the timing when the touch input to the touch area F1021a is made. Here, the change of the lighting mode includes the change of the lighting state from the non-lighting state, and the changing of the lighting state from the certain lighting state to the specific lighting state. Moreover, the change of the lighting mode of the LED G 60A may be intermittently changed at predetermined timings as described above, or continuously changed according to the elapsed time (the color changes gradually, The blinking interval may gradually change). Also, the control of the plurality of LEDs G60A based on the touch input to the touch area F1021a is limited to being performed by sending an instruction signal from the control circuit F10250 to the LED substrate G60 and / or the projector control means as described above. I will not. For example, the control circuit F10250 may control the plurality of LEDs G60A directly by configuring the gaming apparatus F1 such that the plurality of LEDs G60A are connected to the control circuit F10250.

(Outline of the ninth embodiment)
The gaming apparatus F1 of the ninth embodiment has an exterior panel F1021 in which a translucent portion F1021b having transparency is provided in a touch area touched by a player, and has transparency, and the back side of the exterior panel F1021 The touch sensor F1022 is provided in correspondence with the touch area F1021a and detects a touch input to the touch area F1021a, the LED array F1024, and the back side of the touch sensor F1022, and light from the LED array F1024 is transmitted to the exterior panel F1021. And a control circuit F10250 that performs lighting control of the LED array F1024.

  According to the above configuration, when there is a touch input from the player in the touch area F1021a, the touch sensor F1022 detects the touch input. On the other hand, the control circuit F10250 is turned on by the lighting control of the LED array F1024, light from the LED array F1024 is guided to the light transmitting portion F1021b, and the player can visually recognize the light from the light transmitting portion F1021b It becomes. With such a configuration, since the light transmitting portion F1021b in the touch area F1021a of the exterior panel F1021 is irradiated with light from the LED array F1024, the player can easily recognize the place to be touched, and the conventional call button can be used. As described above, since the input is performed on the touch area F 1021 a which is not movable and is formed in a plane, it is possible to prevent a failure due to dust etc. entering the operating place or a failure due to fatigue of the movable part. Become.

  In the gaming machine F1 of the ninth embodiment, the control circuit F10250 performs control to change the lighting mode of the LED array F1024 when there is a touch input to the touch area F1021a.

  According to the above configuration, the player can recognize that his / her touch has been input by changing the lighting mode of the LED array F 1024 that illuminates the light transmitting unit F 1021 b. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from touching the touch area F1021a many times until the attendant is called, and the surface of the touch area being deteriorated.

  In the gaming machine F1 of the ninth embodiment, a light transmitting plate G61 having a light transmitting property, which is disposed detachably on the base G101 and is formed so as to penetrate the opening side end face G61b of a predetermined shape in the thickness direction; A plurality of LEDs G 60A are disposed at positions facing the opening side end face G61b forming the opening G61a of the light guide plate G61, and the plurality of LEDGs 60A are arranged in parallel along the opening side end face G61b , The light guide plate G61 is subjected to a reflection process of reflecting part of the light guided from the plurality of LEDs G 60A into the light guide plate G61 via the opening side end face G61 b in the thickness direction of the light guide plate G61 The part G61 d is formed, and the control circuit F10250 specifies a plurality of LED G 60A as specific points when there is a touch input to the touch area F1021 a. It may control to change the mode.

  According to the above configuration, the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs G 60A becomes a specific lighting mode according to the player's touch input, and spreads radially in the light guide plate G61 to reach the outer end surface, thereby the light guide plate G61 It becomes possible to illuminate the entire periphery of the ring annularly, and the light guide plate G61 illuminated in a specific lighting mode becomes visible from any direction of the game apparatus F1, and the manager of the game arcade It becomes easy to specify the gaming machine to which the stored gaming apparatus F1 is attached. Furthermore, the designability can be improved by the light emitted from the surface of the light guide plate G61, and since the light guide plate G61 is detachable from the base, it can be replaced by the light guide plate G61 subjected to reflection processing of different designs. Therefore, the game apparatus F1 can be applied to various types of game machines.

  In the gaming machine F1 of the ninth embodiment, the control circuit F10250 performs control to change the lighting modes of the plurality of LEDGs 60A according to the elapsed time from the timing when the touch input to the touch area F1021a is made. Good.

  According to the above configuration, the manager of the game arcade can recognize at a glance even the position away from the gaming machine by visually recognizing the lighting mode of the light guide plate G61 from the time when the player performs the touch input. Even in the case where there are a plurality of gaming devices F1 for which touch input has been performed, it is possible to give a corresponding priority, which makes it possible to provide an appropriate service to the player.

[One Specific Example of Configuration of Gaming Machine Connected to Display Device for Gaming (Game Device) According to First to Ninth Embodiments]
Next, a specific example of the configuration of the gaming machine to which the gaming display device (gaming device) according to the first to ninth embodiments described above is connected will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, the pachislot gaming machine 2b is described as an example of the gaming machine.

  FIG. 41 is a view showing the external structure of the pachislot gaming machine 2b, FIGS. 42 and 43 are views showing the circuit configuration of the pachislot gaming machine 2b, and FIG. 44 is a display device 1 for gaming (game gaming device ) And a connection configuration of the pachislot gaming machine 2b, and FIG. 45 is a view showing a functional flow of the pachislot gaming machine 2b.

<External structure of pachislot machine>
As shown in FIG. 41, the casing forming the whole of the pachislot gaming machine 2b includes a box-like cabinet and a front door 202 for opening and closing the cabinet. At the left and right of the front door 202, lamps 214 capable of emitting light of a plurality of colors are provided.

  The lamp 214 is composed of an existing light emitting element capable of emitting at least green, yellow, blue and red, such as a light emitting diode (LED) or an organic electroluminescence (organic EL). I do.

  In the approximate center of the front of the front door 202, vertically long rectangular display windows 221L, 221C, 221R are provided. A middle center line 208 is set in the display windows 221L, 221C, and 221R. The center line 208 is a winning determination line activated by operating a bet button 211 described later or inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 222 (these operations are referred to as “inserting operation”). The activated winning determination line is also referred to as an “effective line”. Further, in the present example, one valid line is set, but a plurality of valid lines may be set.

  On the back of the front door 202, a plurality of reels 203L, 203C, 203R are rotatably provided in a horizontal row. On each of the reels 203L, 203C, 203R, a symbol row as identification information composed of a plurality of types of symbols necessary for the game is drawn on each outer peripheral surface, and the symbols of each reel 203L, 203C, 203R are It can be visually recognized from the outside of the pachislot gaming machine 2b through the display windows 221L, 221C, 221R. The reels 203L, 203C, and 203R rotate at a constant speed (for example, 80 rotations / minute), and variably display symbol rows.

  A back lamp (not shown) is provided inside each of the reels 203L, 203C, 203R. The back lamps illuminate the symbols of the reels 203L, 203C, 203R from behind, and one reel 203L, 203C, corresponding to the three symbols displayed in the display windows 221L, 221C, 221R. Three light sources are provided vertically in line with the 203R. These light sources illuminate so that each symbol is easily visible during rotation of the reels 203L, 203C, and 203R, and after stopping, perform notification etc. of winning combinations according to a specific lighting mode (or blinking mode). It is also used for directing.

  The liquid crystal display device 205 is provided above the display windows 221L, 221C, and 221R. The liquid crystal display device 205 has a display surface larger than the display windows 221L, 221C, and 221R, and performs effects by various image displays. In addition, speakers 209L and 209R are provided at the lower front of the front door 202, and perform effects by sounds such as various sound effects and sounds.

  At the left of the display windows 221L, 221C, 221R, a 7-segment display 213 consisting of a 7-segment LED is provided. The 7-segment indicator 213 is a game medal display area for displaying the number of medals inserted (the number of inserted medals) inserted in the current game or the number of medals paid out to the player as a bonus (pachislot machine machine) 2b A credit display area for displaying the number of medals deposited in the inside (credit number), an area such as a section display area for displaying information indicating whether or not it is an advantageous section described later , Digital display of various information to the player. The section display area may be provided at an arbitrary position of the front door 202 separately from the 7-segment display 213. In this case, the section display area is separately configured as a section indicator. In this case, the section display may use another light source (for example, an LED or the like) without using 7 segments.

  Below the display windows 221L, 221C, 221R, pedestals 210 of substantially horizontal surfaces are formed. In the horizontal surface of the pedestal portion 210, the medal insertion port 222 is provided on the right side, and the bet button 211 is provided on the left side.

  When medals have been deposited inside the pachislot machine 2b, pressing the bet button 211 causes the number of medals (for example, three) to be offered for unit game to be inserted, and the above-mentioned winning determination is made. The line is activated.

  At the top of the medal insertion slot 222, an effect button 246 is provided. The effect button 246 is operated at a predetermined timing when executing a predetermined effect, for example, changing a displayed image or selecting or determining a desired operation on a menu screen. Used in

  Stop buttons 207L, 207C, and 207R as stop operation means for stopping the rotations of the three reels 203L, 203C, and 203R by the pressing operation of the player are provided substantially at the center of the front surface portion of the pedestal portion 210. ing. In the present example, the unit game is basically started by operating a start lever 206 described later, and ends when the rotation of all the reels 203L, 203C, 203R is stopped.

  At the left side of the front surface of the pedestal portion 210, a settlement button 212 is provided which switches the credit / payout of the medal obtained in the game by the push button operation. By operating this settlement button 212, the medals obtained by the player will be deposited inside the pachislot machine 2b or medals will be paid out from the medal payout opening 215 described later, and the medal receiving portion 216 described later It is selected to be stored in the On the right side of the settlement button 212, the player starts rotating all the reels 203L, 203C, 203R by the turning operation of the player, and starts the variation display of the symbols in the display windows 221L, 221C, 221R. A start lever 206 as a means is rotatably mounted within a predetermined angular range.

  In the front of the lower portion of the front door 202, a medal payout port 215 for dispensing medals and a medal receiving portion 216 for storing the dispensed medals are provided. In addition, on the surface of the lower part of the front door 202, a lumbar panel 220 with a design corresponding to the motif of the model is attached to the surface sandwiched up and down by the stop buttons 207L, 207C, 207R and the medal receiver 216. It is done.

  Holding parts 247 are provided on both sides of the cabinet, and are easy to carry when moving the pachislot game machine 2b, such as when installing the pachislot machine 2b. In addition, although the display device 1 for game (game device) is provided on a so-called game island and is included in an island facility (not shown), in this example, it is arranged above the cabinet It is attached.

<Circuit configuration of pachislot machine>
As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the pachislot machine 2b in this example includes a main control circuit 271, a sub control circuit 272, an external relay terminal board 217, and peripheral devices (actuators) electrically connected to these. ing.

(Main control circuit)
The main control circuit 271 has a microcomputer 230 installed on a circuit board (main control board) as a main component. The microcomputer 230 includes a CPU (hereinafter, main CPU) 231, a ROM (hereinafter, main ROM) 232, and a RAM (hereinafter, main RAM) 233.

  In the main ROM 232, control programs executed by the main CPU 231 (Fig. 48 or 51 etc. described later), data tables such as an internal lottery table (Fig. 47 or 50 etc. described later), various types for the sub control circuit 272 Data for transmitting a control command (command) is stored, and the main CPU 231 controls the progress of the game according to the information. The main RAM 233 is provided with a storage area (not shown) for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by execution of the control program and a game state.

  To the main CPU 231, a clock pulse generation circuit 234, a frequency divider 235, a random number generator 236, and a sampling circuit 237 are connected. The clock pulse generation circuit 234 and the divider 235 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 231 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 236 generates a predetermined range of random numbers (e.g., 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 237 extracts one or more necessary values (random number values) from the generated random numbers.

  A switch or the like is connected to the input port of the microcomputer 230. The main CPU 231 receives an input such as a switch to control the operation of peripheral devices such as the stepping motors 249L, 249C, 249R. The stop switch 207S detects that each of the three stop buttons 207L, 207C and 207R has been pressed by the player (stop operation). Further, the start switch 206S detects that the player has operated the start lever 206 (start operation).

  The medal sensor 242S detects that the medal accepted by the medal insertion slot 222 has passed through a medal detection device (selector) (not shown). Further, the bet switch 211S detects that the bet button 211 has been pressed by the player. Further, the settlement switch 212S detects that the settlement button 212 is pressed by the player.

  As peripheral devices whose operations are controlled by the microcomputer 230, there are stepping motors 249L, 249C, 249R, a 7-segment indicator 213 and a medal payout device (hopper) 240. Also, a circuit for controlling the operation of each peripheral device is connected to the output port of the microcomputer 30.

  The motor drive circuit 239 controls driving of stepping motors 249L, 249C, 249R provided corresponding to the respective reels 203L, 203C, 203R. The reel position detection circuit 250 detects a reel index, which indicates that the reels 203L, 203C, and 203R have made one rotation, according to each of the reels 203L, 203C, and 203R, by an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit.

  The stepping motors 249L, 249C, 249R are configured such that the amount of movement is proportional to the number of pulse outputs, and the rotation axis can be stopped at a designated angle. The driving forces of the stepping motors 249L, 249C, 249R are transmitted to the reels 203L, 203C, 203R through gears having a predetermined reduction ratio. The reels 203L, 203C, and 203R rotate at a constant angle each time one pulse is output to the stepping motors 249L, 249C, and 249R.

  The reel position detection circuit 250 counts the number of times the pulse is output to the stepping motors 249L, 249C, 249R after detecting the reel index. Thus, the main CPU 231 manages the rotation angles of the reels 203L, 203C, 203R (that is, how many symbols the reels 203L, 203C, 203R have rotated), and is arranged on the surfaces of the reels 203L, 203C, 203R. The position of each symbol is managed.

  The display drive circuit 248 controls the operation of the 7-segment display 213. The hopper drive circuit 241 also controls the operation of the hopper 240. Further, the payout completion signal circuit 251 manages detection of medals performed by the medal detection unit 240S provided in the hopper 240, and checks whether the medals discharged from the hopper 240 to the outside have reached the number of payouts.

  The external relay terminal board 217 outputs a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, an advantage section signal, etc., which will be described later, to the outside. A signal from the external relay terminal board 217 is input to an external device such as the game display device 1, the game medium lending device 3 and the server device 4. The details of the signal output from the external relay terminal board 217 will be described later.

(Sub control circuit)
The sub control circuit 272 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 271, and performs processing such as determination of an effect content and execution based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 271. The sub control circuit 272 basically includes a CPU (hereinafter, sub CPU) 281, a ROM (hereinafter, sub ROM) 282, a RAM (hereinafter, sub RAM) 283, a rendering processor 284, a drawing RAM 285, a driver 287, a DSP A digital signal processor 288, an audio RAM 289, an A / D converter 290, and an amplifier 291 are included.

  The sub CPU 281 controls the effect according to information such as the control program and the effect data stored in the sub ROM 282 in accordance with the command transmitted from the main control circuit 271. The sub RAM 283 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined effect contents and effect data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination and a game state transmitted from the main control circuit 271.

  The control program stored in the sub ROM 282 includes, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 271 and performing determination and registration of effect contents (render data) based on communication contents. The animation task that controls the display of the image by the liquid crystal display device 205 based on the contents of the effect, the lamp control task that controls the light output by the lamp 214, the sound control task that controls the sound output by the speakers 209L and 209R, and the like are included. .

  The effect data stored in the sub ROM 282 includes, for example, various data tables, effect configuration data constituting each effect content, animation data relating to creation of video, sound data relating to BGM and sound effects, and patterns of light on / off. Lamp data etc. are included.

  Further, to the sub control circuit 272, the liquid crystal display device 205, the speakers 209L and 209R, the lamp 214, and the effect button 246 are connected as peripheral devices whose operation is controlled.

  The sub CPU 281, the rendering processor 284, the drawing RAM 285 (including the frame buffer 286), and the driver 287 create a video according to the animation data specified by the rendering content, and display the created video on the liquid crystal display device 205.

  The sub CPU 281, the DSP 288, the audio RAM 289, the A / D converter 290, and the amplifier 291 output sounds such as BGM from the speakers 209L and 209R in accordance with sound data designated by the contents of the effect. Further, the sub CPU 281 turns on and off the lamp 214 in accordance with the lamp data designated by the contents of the effect.

(Control unit of display device for gaming)
The control unit 100 of the game display device 1 (game device) is electrically connected to the main control circuit 271 via the external relay terminal plate 217, and the main control circuit 271 is connected to the relay circuit (see FIG. 44). Processing such as control of effect display and display control of game information is performed based on various signals transmitted via the network. The control unit 100 basically includes a display CPU 101, a display ROM 102, a display RAM 103, and a drive circuit group 104.

  The display CPU 101 controls image display related to effect display and display of game information according to a control program stored in the display ROM 102 in accordance with various signals transmitted from the main control circuit 271 and the player's selection operation. I do. The display RAM 103 stores various information related to the pachislot machine 2b, data collected by the display CPU 101, and the like in accordance with various signals transmitted from the main control circuit 271. The drive circuit group 104 is used to drive and control the various devices and various units described in the first to ninth embodiments.

<Connection configuration of display device for game (game device) and pachislot machine>
As shown in FIG. 44, the game display device 1 (game device) and the pachislo game machine 2b of this example are connected in one direction via the external relay terminal board 217. Specifically, the main control board 271 outputs (sends) various signals to the game display device 1 (game device) through the plurality of signal lines L1 to L8.

  When the start lever 206 is operated at the start of a unit game, the signal line L1 mainly indicates a number of medals inserted as the number necessary for the start of the unit game as a medal insertion signal indicating one pulse per sheet. The control substrate 271 is output to the game display device 1. The medal insertion signal may be output from the signal line L1 when the medal is inserted regardless of whether the start lever 206 is operated.

  The signal line L2 outputs the payout number of medals paid out by the medal payout device 240 as a result of unit game from the main control board 271 to the game display device 1 as a medal payout signal indicating one pulse per sheet. .

  When the gaming state shifts to a special gaming state (bonus gaming state) advantageous to the player, the current gaming state is a special gaming state until the special gaming state (bonus gaming state) ends. A bonus in-on signal indicating that it is in the state (bonus gaming state) is output from the main control board 271 to the game display device 1. Note that, for example, in the case where a plurality of special gaming states (bonus gaming state) are provided in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, when the first special gaming state (bonus gaming state) occurs, from the signal line L3 The first bonus in progress signal (bonus in progress signal 1) is output, and the second special gaming state (bonus in progress) occurs, the signal line L4 outputs another bonus in progress signal (bonus in progress signal 2) By doing this, it becomes possible to recognize the type of the transitioned special gaming state (bonus gaming state) and the number of occurrences thereof on the gaming display device 1 side. However, if only one type of special gaming state (bonus gaming state) is provided in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, only one of the signal line L3 or the signal line L4 is used, and the other is not used. You can also.

  When the signal line L5 shifts to an advantageous section to be described later or when it is determined to shift to an advantageous section, an advantageous section signal indicating that the advantageous section is an advantageous section until the end of the advantageous section is used as a main control board Output from 271 to the game display device 1. Note that the advantageous section signal is output only once at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of the game or at the end of the game) when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section or when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section. It may be Also, for example, even if the advantageous section is provided in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, whether or not it is the advantageous section is notified only by the above-mentioned section indicator so that the advantageous section signal is not output. It is also good. Further, for example, in the case where a plurality of types of advantageous sections are provided in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, the same advantageous section signal is output from the signal line L5 regardless of which advantageous section is generated. If a first advantageous section (for example, a first advantageous section described later) is generated, one advantageous section signal (advantageous section signal 1) is output from the signal line L5, and a second advantageous section is generated. When (for example, a second advantageous section described later) occurs, another advantageous section signal (favorable section signal 2) is output from another signal line (for example, the above-mentioned unused signal line L4). You may

  When the gaming state shifts to a specific RT gaming state, the signal line L6 plays an RT in-progress signal from the main control board 271 indicating a specific RT gaming state until the specific RT gaming state ends. Output to the display device 1; Here, the specific RT gaming state is a relatively high probability that a replay combination in which a replay is activated is determined as an internal winning combination when a plurality of RT gaming states are provided in the pachislot gaming machine 2b. It is general that one RT gaming state in the high RT gaming state is defined as a specific RT gaming state, but the low RT gaming has a relatively low probability that a replay combination is determined as an internal winning combination. One RT gaming state of the states may be defined as a specific RT gaming state. Note that the during RT signal may be output only once at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of game or at the end of game) when it is shifted to a specific RT gaming state. Also, for example, even if a plurality of RT gaming states are provided in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, the RT in-progress signal may not be output without defining a specific RT gaming state.

  When various errors occur in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, the signal line L7 is an open front door until the generated errors are resolved or the front door 202 is opened. A security signal indicating that an abnormality or the like has occurred in the pachislot game machine 2b is output from the main control board 271 to the game display device 1 until the state 202 is closed.

  The signal line L8 is used as a so-called common signal line, and is provided to electrically connect the main control board 271 and the external relay terminal plate 217. Therefore, it is not provided between the external relay terminal board 217 and the game display device 1.

  The configurations and uses of the signal lines L1 to L8 are merely examples, and the number of signal lines and the types of signals to be output are not limited to the above, and the configuration of the pachislot machine 2b or the game It can be suitably changed according to the structure of the display apparatus 1.

  Further, in this example, the main control board 271 and the external relay terminal plate 217 are connected in parallel by the signal lines L1 to L8 (that is, signals are transmitted in parallel), and the external relay terminal plate 217 The parallel connection with the game display device 1 is also made by the signal lines L1 to L7, but the transmission method is not limited to this. For example, one or both of the main control board 271 and the external relay terminal board 217 and / or the external relay terminal board 217 and the game display device 1 may be serialized by a single signal line (communication line). It may be configured to be connected (that is, to transmit signals in series), and data may be transmitted timely so that the various signals described above can be recognized. In this case, a serial-to-parallel conversion IC (not shown) may be provided at an appropriate position of the main control board 271, the external relay terminal board 217, and the game display device 1.

  Further, among the various signals described above, one or more of the various signals are transmitted from the main control board 271 to the external relay terminal board 217 by signal lines (communication lines) provided separately from the signal lines L1 to L8. You may Specifically, for example, the above-described advantageous section signal may be transmitted from the main control board 271 to the external relay terminal board 217 by a signal line (communication line) provided separately. In this way, there is no need to change the configuration of the existing signal lines L1 to L8 between the pachislot gaming machine 2b in which the advantageous section is mounted and the pachislot gaming machine 2b in which the advantageous section is not mounted. The versatility of the main control board 271 or the external relay terminal board 217 can be enhanced.

  In this case, the signal line (communication line) provided separately may use a parallel transmission method or a serial transmission method. For example, the existing serial port of the main control board 271 By transmitting the above-mentioned advantageous section signal (or data equivalent thereto) by serial transmission using not shown, it is possible to transmit necessary information without major design change. Further, in this case, the signal line (communication line) separately provided may be directly connected to the game display device 1 without the intervention of the external relay terminal board 217. A signal line (communication line) different from the signal lines L1 to L7 may be provided between the external relay terminal board 217 and the game display device 1 so as to have the same configuration as that described above.

  In addition, information based on various signals output from the main control board 271 is installed in the server device 4 or the same island via the island controller 105 connected to the game display device 1 (game device). It is transmitted to each other display device in the island. Thereby, for example, in the server device 4, it becomes possible to grasp and manage the state of each gaming machine 2 (pachislot gaming machine 2b) installed in the game arcade. Also, for example, in each of the other island display devices for gaming, it is possible to notify that there has been a change in some situation in the pachislot gaming machine 2b installed in the same island. Although not shown in FIG. 44, information based on various signals output from the main control board 271 is transmitted via the island controller 105 connected to the game display device 1 (game device). The game media lending device 3 is also sent. Thereby, for example, in the gaming medium lending device 3, it becomes possible to grasp and manage the state of the gaming machine 2 (pachislot gaming machine 2b) installed correspondingly. However, as described above, the game display device 1 may be connected to the game medium lending device 3 and the server device 4 by adopting another connection line or connection method.

<Function flow of Pachislot machine>
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, main functions of the pachislot machine 2b will be described. In the pachislot gaming machine 2b, the respective units shown in FIG. 45 execute necessary processing, and the functions carried by the respective units are exhibited, thereby enabling the player to execute the game.

(Input operation detection means)
The insertion operation detection means detects an insertion operation of game media such as medals and coins by the player. When the insertion operation of a predetermined number of game media (for example, three medals) is detected, the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means described later is permitted. Further, in the symbol display means described later, a predetermined winning determination line is activated. In this example, the selector for detecting the insertion of the medal by the player and the bet switch 211S for detecting the operation of the bet button 211 by the player constitute an insertion operation detection means. The types of game media that can be detected are not limited to medals, and include coins, tokens, game balls, electromagnetic game media having equivalent values to these, and the like.

(Start operation detection means)
The start operation detection means detects a start operation by the player. When the start operation is detected, variable display of symbols by symbol display means described later is started. Further, a random number value (random number value for lottery) used when an internal winning combination determination means to be described later determines an internal winning combination is extracted from within a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535). Further, the effect random number used when the effect control means described later controls the contents of the effect is extracted from within a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 127, 0 to 16383). In this example, the start switch 206S for detecting the operation of the start lever 206 by the player constitutes start operation detection means. The type, number, and numerical range of the random number to be extracted are not limited to the above, and the random number of the number required in the game can be extracted from within the predetermined numerical range. .

(Internal winning combination determination means)
The internal winning combination determination means draws a lottery based on the extracted random number value, and determines an internal winning combination from among a plurality of predetermined combinations. That is, by the determination of the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols permitted to be displayed on the activated line is determined. In the present example, the main control circuit 271 that executes the internal lottery process based on the extracted random number values with reference to various tables (FIG. 47 or 50 etc. described later) constitutes an internal winning combination determination means. In addition, as a type of combination of symbols, it relates to "winning" (also referred to as "formation") in which a player is given a privilege such as payout of medals, operation of replay (replay), activation of bonus, etc. The other things related to so-called "loss" are provided.

  Further, the pachislot gaming machine 2b can perform control such that the progress of the game is stopped (the game operation of the player is invalidated). Such control is referred to as "locking" (or "freezing"). For convenience, the control to stop the progress of the game executed at the start of the game is called "lock at the start of the game", and the control to stop the progress of the game executed at the end of the game is "lock at the end of game" Call. That is, the "game start lock" means that the progress of the game is stopped in the sense that the operation to the stop buttons 207L, 207C and 207R is not effective in a predetermined period after the start lever 206 is operated. The “game end lock” is an operation on the bet button 211 or an operation on the start lever 206 in a predetermined period after the stop buttons 207L, 207C, and 207R are operated. Is a control in which the progress of the game is stopped in the sense that it does not become effective. Of course, the trigger of the "lock" is not limited to the above, and for example, in a predetermined period after the start lever 206 is operated and any one of the stop buttons 207L, 207C, 207R is operated, Control may be performed in which the subsequent operation is not effective.

  Here, the internal winning combination determining means performs a lottery based on the extracted random number value, and can determine whether or not to "lock" instead of the internal winning combination or together with the internal winning combination. In this case, a plurality of random number values are extracted, an internal winning combination is determined based on one of the random number values, and whether or not to perform "lock" is determined based on the other one random number value. It may be That is, in the pachislot machine 2b, in addition to determining the internal winning combination based on the extracted random value, it is possible to determine whether or not to "lock" based on the extracted random value. ing. In this case, the main control circuit 271 constitutes lock determination means.

(Symbol display means)
The symbol display means variably displays a plurality of symbols (identification information) in a plurality of columns. That is, when the start operation is detected by the start operation detection means, the variable display of symbols is started, and when the stop control is executed by the stop control means described later, the variable display of symbols is ended. In this example, the plurality of reels 203L, 203C, 203R and the display windows 221L, 221C, 221R (symbol display area 221) constitute symbol display means. The symbol display means is not limited to this, and may be, for example, a symbol image display means (for example, an image display device) that variably displays a plurality of symbol images in a plurality of lines.

(Stop operation detection means)
The stop operation detection means detects a stop operation by the player. When the stop operation is detected, the fluctuation display of the symbols by the symbol display means is stopped by the stop control means described later. In this example, the stop switch 207S for detecting the operation of the stop buttons 207L, 207C, 207R by the player constitutes a stop operation detecting means.

  Note that the first stop operation is performed first when the reels are rotated while all reels are rotating, and the second stop operation after the first stop operation is performed after the second stop operation and the second stop operation. The stop operation performed is called the third stop operation.

(Stop control means)
The stop control means controls the stop of the fluctuation display of the symbols in the symbol display means. That is, when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means, the variation display of the symbols in the symbol display means is stopped based on the stop control information set according to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means Control. In this example, when the player operates the stop buttons 207L, 207C, and 207R, the various types of stop control information are referenced to execute reel stop control processing for stopping and controlling the rotation of the corresponding reels 203L, 203C, and 203R. The main control circuit 271 constitutes stop control means.

  Here, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a prescribed time (190 msec or 75 msec) after each stop button is pressed. In this example, the number of symbols moving with the rotation of the reel within the specified time is referred to as "the number of sliding pieces". If the specified time is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols is determined to be four symbols, and if the specified time is 75 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols is determined to be one symbol. The maximum number of sliding symbols is not limited to these, and can be set as appropriate.

  The stop control means is configured to display the combination of the symbols as much as possible along the effective line using the prescribed time for the combination of symbols for which display is permitted according to the determination result of the internal winning combination. Stop the reel rotation in the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces.

  On the other hand, according to the determination result of the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols not permitted to be displayed is such that the maximum sliding piece is not displayed along the effective line using the above-mentioned prescribed time. Stop spinning the reel in a range of numbers.

  Further, the stop control means is for changing the combination of symbols displayed in accordance with a predetermined stop operation procedure (for example, the order in which each stop button is operated) the determined internal winning combination is performed. At that time, referring to the procedure of the predetermined stop operation, control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel is performed.

(Prize judging means)
The prize determination means determines whether or not there is a prize (is established) in accordance with the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. That is, when the variable display of symbols is stopped by the stop control means, the winning or non-winning of the winning combination is determined based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the effective line. In the present example, the main control circuit 271 that executes the winning search processing based on the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means constitutes a winning judgment means.

(Meal grant means)
The profit granting means grants a profit according to the combination of the winning symbols when it is determined by the prize judging means that there is a prize. That is, in accordance with the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means, the corresponding benefit is given to the player. In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 271 which executes medal payout processing and the like based on the result of the winning search processing constitutes a profit giving means. Further, the profit giving means may give the player a corresponding profit according to the determination result of the internal winning combination determining means. In the case where the benefit to be provided is one to be provided by the control of the sub control circuit 272, the sub control circuit 272 constitutes a profit giving means.

  Here, as the profit provided by the profit giving means, medal payout, game media of the same quantity as the current game are automatically inserted, and the inside of the operation of the re-play and the re-play in which the game can be played again Activation of the high RT gaming state (replay time) where the winning probability of winning combination is high, activation of the special gaming state (bonus gaming state) where the winning probability of internal winning combination related to the payout of medals is high, stop suitable for the player By notifying the procedure of the operation, it is specified to increase the winning probability of the combination of symbols that will be paid out more medals, or to increase the winning probability of the combination of symbols that triggers the operation of the high RT gaming state The operation etc. of the production state (assist time) of can be mentioned. The benefits provided by the profit giving means are not limited to this.

  As described above, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, when the player's insertion operation is detected by the insertion operation detection unit and the player's start operation is detected by the start operation detection unit, the internal winning combination determination unit determines the internal winning combination Etc. are determined, and variable display of symbols by the symbol display means is started. Then, when the player's stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means, and the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means is the prize determination means When it is determined that the combination of symbols related to winning is determined, the profit giving means gives a profit according to the combination of the marks. A series of flows as described above are performed as one game (unit game) in the pachislot machine 2b.

(Effect control means)
Based on the extracted effect random number value, other information (for example, an internal winning combination), or that a predetermined transition opportunity has been established, the effect control means is in an appropriate effect state (for example, whether it is a normal section or not Depending on whether it is an advantageous section, the effect state control means (game area control means) for controlling the effect state (game area) so that the game is performed, and the one to be executed this time among a plurality of types of effects are determined And an effect execution control means for controlling an effect execution means, which will be described later, so that the determined effect is appropriately executed. In the present example, the main control circuit 271 that controls the rendering state (game section) constitutes rendering state control means (game section control means), and the main determines the contents of the collaboration in accordance with the control result. The control circuit 271 and the sub control circuit 272 constitute effect content determination means. Further, the sub control circuit 272 which executes the effect according to the determined effect content constitutes an effect execution control means. When control of the effect state (game section) is performed by the sub control circuit 272, the sub control circuit 272 may constitute effect state control means (game area control means). In addition, when the determination of the effect content is performed by one of the main control circuit 271 or the sub control circuit 272, the main control circuit 271 or the sub control circuit 272 may constitute the effect content determining means. Further, when the effect executing means to be described later is controlled by the main control circuit 271, the main control circuit 271 may constitute the effect execution controlling means.

  In addition, the effect state control means (game section control means) and the effect contents determination means, the information necessary for the game for the player when the predetermined notification conditions are satisfied (for example, when it is controlled to the advantageous section) The effect contents for notifying (for example, information related to the procedure of the stop operation and other information useful for the player) are determined. In this case, the effect control means can also be referred to as notification control means.

(Effect execution means)
The effect executing means executes the effect determined by the effect content determining means. In other words, it means various devices used for effects such as a display device or lamp that performs visual effects that appeal to the eye, a speaker that performs visual effects that affect the sense of hearing, and an effect button that performs effects that appeal to the sense of touch. In this example, the 7-segment display 213, the liquid crystal display device 205, the speakers 209L and 209R, the lamp 214, and the effect button 246 constitute an effect executing means. The effect executing means is not limited to these, and may be, for example, a movable body (character) provided at a position visible from the front side of the pachislot machine 2b, or a plurality of reels (for example, The effect may be performed by variably displaying the reels 203L, 203C, 203R) in a different effect mode from the normal symbol variation display mode.

  In addition, the effect executing means determines the effect for notifying the player of information necessary for the game (for example, information related to the procedure of the stop operation and other information useful for the player) by the effect content determining means. When it is determined, the notification of the information is executed to the player. In this case, the effect executing means can also be called informing means.

[First specification example of gaming machine to which display device for game (game device) according to the first to ninth embodiments is connected]
Next, a first specification example of a gaming machine to which the gaming display device (gaming device) according to the first to ninth embodiments described above is connected will be described using FIGS. Also in this example, the pachislot machine 2b is described as an example of the game machine.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram showing the transition of the gaming state of the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the first specification example, and FIG. 47 is a diagram showing the configuration of the internal winning combination of the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the first specification example. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a main control process of the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the first specification example.

<Transition of the game state of the pachislot machine according to the first specification example>
First, with reference to FIG. 46, the transition of the gaming state of the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the first specification example will be described. As shown in FIG. 46, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the first specification example, an advantageous section, which is a gaming section relatively advantageous to the player, as a state where the player plays a game, and the advantageous section Also includes a normal section which is a game section relatively disadvantageous to the player.

  The advantageous section is a relatively advantageous game section in that the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player can be informed, and the normal section can not be notified of the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player It is a relatively disadvantageous game section in the sense of. For example, in the case of the advantageous section, when the winning order replay described later (see FIG. 47) is won, the procedure (stop operation order) of the stop operation to be the correct pressing order is informed. The procedure of the stop operation (stop operation order) which becomes the correct order is not notified. In addition, for example, when winning in a push order small combination (see FIG. 47) described later, if it is an advantageous section, the procedure (stop operation order) of the stop operation to be the push order correct is informed. For example, the procedure of the stop operation (stop operation order) which is the pressing order correct is not notified.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 46, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the first specification example, a BB gaming state (special gaming state) that is relatively advantageous for the player as the gaming state is relative to the player. And a normal gaming state that is disadvantageous to. Also, in the normal gaming state, the low RT gaming state (RT0) having the lowest probability of winning the replay character, the high RT gaming state (RT1) having the highest probability of winning the replay character, and the low probability of winning the replay character The bonus internal winning (RT2) is higher than the gaming state (RT0) and lower than the high RT gaming state (RT1). In contrast to the normal gaming state, the high RT gaming state (RT1) is most advantageous for the player, and then the bonus internal winning (RT2) is advantageous for the player, and the low RT gaming state (RT0). ) Is the most disadvantageous for the player. In the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the first specification example, the high RT gaming state (RT1) is the above-described specific RT gaming state.

  The BB gaming state (special gaming state) is relatively advantageous in the sense that the probability of winning a medal paying out role (in this example, a small winning combination in this example) that medals will be paid out to the player is higher than that in the normal gaming state. The game state is normal (see FIG. 47), and the normal game state is relative in the sense that the probability of winning this medal payout role (in this example, the small winning combination) is lower than that of the BB gaming state (special gaming state). The game state is disadvantageous to (see FIG. 47).

(Transition in the normal section)
The player usually starts playing in the normal gaming state in the normal section. More specifically, the game is started from the low RT gaming state (RT0). As described above, in the normal section, since the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player is not notified, the probability of shifting from the low RT gaming state (RT0) to the high RT gaming state (RT1) is low. When the player successfully wins a push and the order is correctly correct and the later mentioned rise replay is established, the low RT gaming state (RT0) is shifted to the high RT gaming state (RT1). However, it is difficult to keep pushing the correct order by accident, and it is difficult to correct the pushing order when the pushing order replay is won, and the following downward replay is established, or the pushing order incorrect answer when the pushing order small part is elected Also, when the pressed position is incorrect and the below-mentioned falling symbol is established, the high RT gaming state (RT1) is shifted to the low RT gaming state (RT0).

  In addition, in the normal gaming state (low RT gaming state (RT0) or high RT gaming state (RT1)), when it is elected to the BB (special role) described later, transition to during bonus internal winning (RT2) (BB Won). In addition, BB is a bonus combination, and is held as an internal winning combination until a combination of symbols of BB is stopped and displayed on the activated line after winning BB (that is, at the end of a unit game) Will not be cleared). This is called "possession", and such a bonus part is also called "possession role".

  When the combination of symbols of BB is stopped and displayed on the activated line during bonus internal winning (RT2), transition is made from the normal gaming state (during bonus internal winning (RT2)) to the BB gaming state (special gaming state). Here, in FIG. 46, during bonus internal winning (RT2) is referred to as a "standby section". This is a section from the bonus winning to the bonus establishment when the advantageous section start condition (for example, the advantageous section start condition B described later) is established in relation to the bonus winning. This is because identification is made as a section to wait (that is, a waiting section). Therefore, strictly speaking, during the bonus internal winning (RT2) in the normal section is not a standby section (in the sense of waiting for the start of the advantageous section), but for convenience, it is referred to as a "standby section" There is.

  In addition, in the BB gaming state (special gaming state), when the number of medals exceeding the predetermined payout number of medals is paid out, the BB gaming state ends (BB ending), and the BB gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state (More specifically, transition to the low RT gaming state (RT0)). In the present example, the predetermined number of medals paid out is set to “240”.

  In addition, in the normal gaming state (low RT gaming state (RT0) or high RT gaming state (RT1)), when winning a special small role 1 described later, advantageous zone start conditions are satisfied (favorable segment start condition A satisfied) The section display area (section indicator) lights up at an arbitrary timing up to the start of the next unit game and it is informed that the transition to the advantageous section is made, and the normal gaming state (low RT of the advantageous section from the next unit game) Transition to gaming state (RT0) or high RT gaming state (RT1)). For example, in the low RT gaming state (RT0) of the normal section, when winning a special small role 1 described later, it becomes the low RT gaming state (RT0) of the advantageous section from the next unit game.

  Also, in the normal gaming state (low RT gaming state (RT0) or high RT gaming state (RT1)), when a special small role 1 + BB described later is won (ie, special small role 1 and BB overlap winning), and If the independent BB of is won (that is, only BB alone is elected), an advantageous section start condition is satisfied (an advantageous section start condition B is established), and the above-mentioned standby section (bonus internal winning (RT2)) is advantageous. Transition to the BB gaming state (special gaming state) of the section. In this case, in the pachislot machine 2b according to the first specification example, the standby section may be identified as being a part of the advantageous section, and the symbol combination of BB is effective in the standby section. When the stop display is performed on the line, the advantageous section may be identified as starting. That is, the section display area (section indicator) lights up at an arbitrary timing from the establishment of the advantageous section start condition (in this case, the advantageous section start condition B) until the symbol combination of BB is stopped and displayed on the effective line. It may be notified that the transition to the advantageous section will be made, and the section display area (section indicator) lights up when the symbol combination of BB is stopped and displayed on the effective line and it shifts to the advantageous section Then, it may be notified that the transition to the advantageous section is made.

(Transition in advantageous section)
The advantageous section includes the normal gaming state and the BB gaming state (special gaming state) of the advantageous section (as described above, when the standby section is also included in the advantageous section, it also includes the standby section). Regardless of whether the advantageous section is in the normal gaming state or the BB gaming state (special gaming state), the advantageous section has a predetermined number of gaming times (playing period) since the start of the advantageous section. End when it is received (the advantageous section end condition is met). In this example, the advantageous section ends when "1500" games are played.

  When the advantageous section start condition A is established from the low RT gaming state (RT0) of the normal section and the transition is made to the advantageous section, the low RT gaming state (RT0) of the advantageous section is transitioned, and the high RT gaming state of the normal section When the advantageous section start condition A is satisfied from (RT1) to shift to the advantageous section, the process shifts to the high RT gaming state (RT1) of the advantageous section. Here, as described above, in the advantageous section, since the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player is notified, as long as the stop operation is performed according to the notification, when the push order replay is won, the push order becomes correct When the below-mentioned rise replay is established and the low RT gaming state (RT0) is established, the low RT gaming state (RT0) is shifted to the high RT gaming state (RT1). Also, in the high RT gaming state (RT1), the high RT gaming state (RT1) is maintained. In addition, when the pushing order small part winning, it becomes the pushing order correct answer becomes the specific small part combination which it mentions later is formed, it means that the medal which is most to the player is paid out.

  Also, in the low RT gaming state (RT0) or high RT gaming state (RT1) of the normal section, when the advantageous section start condition B is satisfied, the BB gaming state as an advantageous section (special gaming state) Move to). Since “BB won”, “BB formation”, and “BB end” in the advantageous section are the same as those in the normal section, the description will be omitted. In addition, in the normal gaming state (low RT gaming state (RT0) or high RT gaming state (RT1)) of the advantageous section, the standby section in the case of “BB winning” is identified to be included in the advantageous section. The number of games in the interval may be counted as the number of games targeted for whether or not the advantageous section end condition is established, or the game may be identified so as not to be included in the advantageous section. The number of times may not be counted as the number of games to be subjected to whether or not the advantageous section end condition is satisfied.

  In addition, in the normal gaming state (low RT gaming state (RT0) or high RT gaming state (RT1)) of the advantageous section, when the cumulative number of times of gaming in the advantageous section reaches the predetermined number of times of playing (1500 times) (the advantageous section ends) The condition is established, the advantageous section ends, and the normal gaming state (low RT gaming state (RT0) or high RT gaming state (RT1)) of the normal section is shifted. In addition, in the BB gaming state (special gaming state) of the advantageous section, when the cumulative number of games in the advantageous section reaches the predetermined number of games (1500 times) (the advantageous section end condition is satisfied), the advantageous section ends, and the normal section Transition to BB gaming state (special gaming state).

  In the present example, when the advantageous section start condition (the advantageous section start condition A and the advantageous section start condition B) is satisfied, the total number of games played in the advantageous section is a predetermined number of times (1500 times). Although the advantageous section is made to continue until then, the advantageous section end condition is not limited to this. For example, the net number of medals (ie, the difference number) obtained by subtracting the inserted number of medals from the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section (ie, the number of differences) becomes a predetermined number (for example, 2000). The number of times the procedure of the stop operation is notified (ie, the number of times of notification) becomes a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times) when the push order replay and / or the push order small part winning is won. May be adopted as the advantageous section end condition. In addition, when the advantageous section starts, an initial value (for example, 100 times) is given as a game period of the advantageous section, and the advantageous section start condition (the advantageous section start condition A and / or When the advantageous section start condition B) is further satisfied, the gaming period of the advantageous section may be extended (the number of games is added).

  Also, in this example, during the BB gaming state (special gaming state), as will be described later, every game BB middle and small winning combination is established regardless of the procedure of the player's stop operation, but the BB gaming state (special The configuration of the internal winning combination in the gaming state is not limited to this. For example, even in the BB gaming state (special gaming state), the push order small combination (which may be a push order small combination different from the push order small combinations 1 to 6 described later) is determined as the internal winning combination with a predetermined probability. It may be configured to be In this way, during the BB gaming state (special gaming state) in the normal section, since the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, the number of medals that can be obtained by the player inevitably decreases. And during the BB gaming state (special gaming state) in the advantageous section, since the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player is informed, the number of medals which can be obtained by the player inevitably increases. As a result, the advantageous section can be configured as a more advantageous game section.

<Configuration of internal winning combination of pachislot machine according to the first specification example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the configuration of the internal winning combination of the pachislot machine 2b according to the first specification example will be described. FIG. 47 shows an internal lottery table used to determine an internal winning combination in an internal lottery process (see S214-1 in FIG. 48) described later.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the pachislot machine 2b according to the first specification example has, as an internal winning combination, a normal replay, a pushing order replay 1 to 6, a normal small part, a pushing order small part 1 to 6, a special small part 1 , Special small role 2, BB medium small role, special small role 1 + BB, special small role 2 + BB, and a single BB. In FIG. 47, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the first specification example, a specific set value (for example, set value "1") is set, and "3" medals are inserted in the normal gaming state An internal lottery table to be referred to when "2" medals are inserted in the time or BB gaming state is shown.

  Here, in the pachislo gaming machine 2b according to the first specification example (the same applies to the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example to be described later; hereinafter, simply described as "pachislot gaming machine 2b") By operating the provided setting switch (not shown) by the store clerk at the game arcade, the setting value of one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of six setting values of “1” to “6”) It is possible to set. Further, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, it is possible to change the lottery value of a part or all of the internal winning combinations in accordance with the set value. This makes it possible to change the degree of advantage of the player according to the operation of the store clerk at the game arcade (setting operation of the setting value). Generally, the lower the setting value is, the lower the degree of advantage of the player is, and the higher the setting value is, the higher the degree of advantage of the player is.

  Further, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, the number of inserted medals capable of starting the game is previously determined for each gaming state, and the number of inserted medals capable of causing the game to be started is determined. When it is determined, it is possible to change the lottery value of a part or all of the internal winning combinations in accordance with the number of inserted sheets. Thereby, it is possible to change the degree of the player's advantage in accordance with the player's operation (insertion operation). In general, the lottery value of the internal lottery table is set such that the degree of advantage of the player is lower as the number of inserted sheets is smaller and the degree of advantage of the player is higher as the number of inserted sheets is larger. In the pachislot gaming machine 2b of the first specification example, "1", "2", and "3" are determined as the number of inserted medals that can start the game in the normal gaming state. In the BB gaming state, "2" is determined as the number of inserted medals which can start the game. On the other hand, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b of the second specification example described later, "3" is determined as the number of medals inserted which can start the game in the normal gaming state and the MB gaming state described later. And However, the number of inserted medals that can start the game is not limited to this.

  In FIG. 47 (the same applies to FIG. 50 described later), the correct pressing order means the pressing order predetermined as a more appropriate pressing order (that is, the player's stop operation order) for the internal winning combination. The stop operation is performed in the coincident push order, and the push order incorrect means that the stop operation is performed in the push order different from the push order that is the correct push order.

  The pressing order correct (123) means that the pressing order predetermined as a more appropriate pressing order is the first stop operation of the stop button 207L, the second stop operation of the stop button 207C, the second stop operation of the stop button 207R 3 Means to stop operation.

  In addition, the pressing order correct (132) is a pressing order predetermined as a more appropriate pressing order, the first stop operation of the stop button 207L, the second stop operation of the stop button 207R, the second stop operation of the stop button 207C 3 Means to stop operation.

  In addition, with the pressing order correct answer (213), the pressing order predetermined as a more appropriate pressing order performs the first stop operation on the stop button 207C, performs the second stop operation on the stop button 207L, and 3 Means to stop operation.

  In addition, the pressing order correct (231) is a pressing order predetermined as a more appropriate pressing order, the first stop operation of the stop button 207C, the second stop operation of the stop button 207R, the second stop operation of the stop button 207L 3 Means to stop operation.

  In addition, with the pressing order correct answer (312), the pressing order predetermined as a more appropriate pressing order performs the first stop operation of the stop button 207R, performs the second stop operation of the stop button 207L, and the stop button 207C 3 Means to stop operation.

  Also, with the pressing order correct answer (321), the pressing order predetermined as a more appropriate pressing order performs the first stop operation on the stop button 207R, performs the second stop operation on the stop button 207C, and the second stop operation on the stop button 207L 3 Means to stop operation.

  In normal replay, a lottery value "4490" is defined in the low RT gaming state (RT0), and 4490/65536 ("65536" is the total number of possible random numbers 0 to 65535 for lottery. The same applies hereinafter). Win by probability. Further, in the high RT gaming state (RT1), a lottery value “35977” is defined, and the player wins with a probability of 35977/65536. The lottery value fluctuates in accordance with the set value. Specifically, the lottery value of the normal small winning combination, which will be described later, increases as the set value increases (the value increases), and decreases (the value decreases). In addition, during the bonus internal winning (RT2), a lottery value "35977" is defined, and winning is made with the probability of 35977/65536. Further, in the BB gaming state, a lottery value “0” is defined, and in the BB gaming state, it is not won.

  When the player wins the normal replay, regardless of the pushing order and the pressed position (that is, the timing when the player performs the stop operation) (pushing order, pressed position unquestioned), the symbol combination of the normal replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line. It is done (normally Replay is established). In addition, each symbol which comprises the combination of the symbol of normal replay is suitably arrange | positioned on the outer peripheral surface of reel 203L, 203C, 203R so that such stop control can be performed.

  In the push-to-play replays 1 to 6, respectively, in the low RT gaming state (RT0), a lottery value “748” is defined, and is won with a probability of 748/65536. Further, in the high RT gaming state (RT1), a lottery value “3567” is defined, and the player wins with a probability of 3567/65536. Further, the lottery value "0" is defined in the bonus internal winning (RT2) and the BB gaming state, and the bonus internal winning (RT2) and the BB gaming state are not won.

  When the push order replay 1 is won, if the stop operation is performed with the push order correct (123), the combination of the symbols of the upward replay (with no pressing position) is stopped and displayed on the effective line (ascend replay Established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with the pressing order incorrect answer, the combination of the symbols of the descent replay (with no concern on the pressed position) is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descent replay established).

  When the push order replay 2 is won, if the stop operation is performed with the push order correct (132), the combination of the symbols of the rise replay (with no pressing position) is stopped and displayed on the effective line (rise replay Established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with the pressing order incorrect answer, the combination of the symbols of the descent replay (with no concern on the pressed position) is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descent replay established).

  When the push order replay 3 is won, if the stop operation is performed with the push order correct (213), the combination of the symbols of the ascending replay (with no pressing position) is stopped and displayed on the activated line (elevation replayed Established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with the pressing order incorrect answer, the combination of the symbols of the descent replay (with no concern on the pressed position) is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descent replay established).

  When the push order replay 4 is won, and the stop operation is performed with the push order correct (231), the combination of the symbols of the upward replay (with no pressing position) is stopped and displayed on the effective line (ascend replay Established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with the pressing order incorrect answer, the combination of the symbols of the descent replay (with no concern on the pressed position) is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descent replay established).

  When the push order replay 5 is won, if the stop operation is performed with the push order correct (312), the combination of the symbols of the ascending replay (with no pressing position) is stopped and displayed on the effective line (elevation replayed Established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with the pressing order incorrect answer, the combination of the symbols of the descent replay (with no concern on the pressed position) is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descent replay established).

  When the push order replay 6 is won, if the stop operation is performed with the push order correct (321), the combination of the symbols of the upward replay (with no pressing position) is stopped and displayed on the effective line (ascend replay Established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with the pressing order incorrect answer, the combination of the symbols of the descent replay (with no concern on the pressed position) is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descent replay established).

  As described above, when any of the push order replays 1 to 6 is won, when the stop operation is performed in the push order that is the push order correct, the combination of symbols of the rise replays is stopped and displayed on the effective line. Thus, if the low RT gaming state (RT0), the high RT gaming state (RT1) is transitioned (increased), and if the high RT gaming state (RT1), the high RT gaming state (RT1) is maintained. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed in the push order which is incorrect in the push order, the combination of the symbols of the down replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line, so it is low in the high RT gaming state (RT1). When the low RT gaming state (RT0), the low RT gaming state (RT0) is maintained. The respective symbols constituting the combination of the symbols of the ascending replay and the descending replay are appropriately arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the reels 203L, 203C, 203R so that such stop control can be performed.

  In the normal small game, the lottery value “1284” is defined in the normal gaming state (low RT gaming state (RT0), high RT gaming state (RT1), and bonus internal winning (RT2)), and the probability of 1284/65536 Win at. The lottery value fluctuates in accordance with the set value. Specifically, it is defined that the lottery value increases as the setting value increases (for example, the lottery value is added by “4” each time the setting value is incremented by 1). Further, in the BB gaming state, a lottery value “0” is defined, and in the BB gaming state, it is not won. Here, in the present example, the lottery value (in other words, the winning probability) changes in accordance with the set value for the normal replay and the small player, and the other internal winning combination depends on the set value. Although it is supposed that the lottery value does not change, it is not limited to this. The lottery value may be varied according to the set value for other internal winning combinations. However, from the viewpoint of securing the soundness of the game, the internal winning combination (for example, special small combination 1, special small combination 1 + BB, and a single BB described later) for determining whether or not to shift to an advantageous zone For the internal winning combinations (for example, push order replays 1 to 6 and push order small effects 1 to 6) for which the procedure of the stop operation is notified in the section, the lottery value is not varied according to the set value. Is desirable.

  When the winning combination is won normally, regardless of the pushing order and the pressed position (pushing order, pressed position regardless), the combination of the symbols of the normal small winning combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line (normal small winning combination established) The medal is paid out. In addition, each symbol which comprises the combination of the symbol of a small part normally is suitably arrange | positioned on the outer peripheral surface of reel 203L, 203C, 203R so that such stop control can be performed.

  In the normal game state (low RT gaming state (RT0), high RT gaming state (RT1), and bonus internal winning (RT2)), the lottery values “1000” are defined for the pushing order minors 1 to 6, respectively. , With a probability of 1000/65536. Further, in the BB gaming state, a lottery value “0” is defined, and in the BB gaming state, it is not won.

  When the push order small winning combination 1 is won, when the stop operation is performed in the push order correct (123), the combination of the symbols of the specific small winning combination (with no pressing position question) is stopped and displayed on the effective line (specific Small role winning), nine medals are paid out. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with a push order incorrect answer, if the timing of the stop operation is the appropriate timing (pressing position correct), the combination of special small winning combination symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective line ( Small medal winning combination), one medal is paid out, but if the timing of the stop operation is not the appropriate timing (pressing position incorrect answer), the combination of symbols of the falling symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descent (descent) Design established). Here, the combination of the symbols of the descending symbol is a combination of a part of predetermined symbols in the combination of the symbols which are lost, and the medal is not paid out. That is, in the case where the pressing order is incorrect and the pressing position is incorrect, “dropout” of the specific small combination and the special small combination is generated.

  When the push order small winning combination 2 is won, and the stop operation is performed in the push order correct (132), the combination of the symbols of the specific small winning combination (with no pressing position question) is stopped and displayed on the effective line (specific Small role winning), nine medals are paid out. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with a push order incorrect answer, if the timing of the stop operation is the appropriate timing (pressing position correct), the combination of special small winning combination symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective line ( Small medal winning combination), one medal is paid out, but if the timing of the stop operation is not the appropriate timing (pressing position incorrect answer), the combination of symbols of the falling symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descent (descent) Design established).

  When the pushing order small part 3 is won, and the stopping operation is performed in the pushing order correct (213), the combination of the symbols of the specific small part is stopped and displayed on the active line Small role winning), nine medals are paid out. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with a push order incorrect answer, if the timing of the stop operation is the appropriate timing (pressing position correct), the combination of special small winning combination symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective line ( Small medal winning combination), one medal is paid out, but if the timing of the stop operation is not the appropriate timing (pressing position incorrect answer), the combination of symbols of the falling symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descent (descent) Design established).

  When the pushing order small part 4 is won, and the stopping operation is performed in the pushing order correct answer (231), the combination of the symbols of the specific small part is stopped and displayed on the activated line Small role winning), nine medals are paid out. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with a push order incorrect answer, if the timing of the stop operation is the appropriate timing (pressing position correct), the combination of special small winning combination symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective line ( Small medal winning combination), one medal is paid out, but if the timing of the stop operation is not the appropriate timing (pressing position incorrect answer), the combination of symbols of the falling symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descent (descent) Design established).

  When the pushing order small part 5 is won, and the stopping operation is performed in the pushing order correct answer (312), the combination of the symbols of the specific small part is stopped and displayed on the activated line Small role winning), nine medals are paid out. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with a push order incorrect answer, if the timing of the stop operation is the appropriate timing (pressing position correct), the combination of special small winning combination symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective line ( Small medal winning combination), one medal is paid out, but if the timing of the stop operation is not the appropriate timing (pressing position incorrect answer), the combination of symbols of the falling symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descent (descent) Design established).

  When the push order small winning combination 6 is won, when the stop operation is performed in the push order correct (321), the combination of the symbols of the specific small winning combination (with no pressing position question) is stopped and displayed on the effective line (specific Small role winning), nine medals are paid out. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with a push order incorrect answer, if the timing of the stop operation is the appropriate timing (pressing position correct), the combination of special small winning combination symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective line ( Small medal winning combination), one medal is paid out, but if the timing of the stop operation is not the appropriate timing (pressing position incorrect answer), the combination of symbols of the falling symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descent (descent) Design established).

  As described above, when the player has won any of the push order minors 1 to 6 and the stop operation is performed in the push order that is the correct push order, the combination of the symbols of the specific small winnings is stopped on the effective line. By being displayed, nine medals are paid out, and in the high RT gaming state (RT1), the high RT gaming state (RT1) is maintained. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed in the push order which is incorrect in the push order, the stop combination is performed when the stop operation is performed at the timing when the pressed position is correct. In the high RT gaming state (RT1), the high RT gaming state (RT1) is maintained, but the stop operation is performed at the timing when the pressing position is incorrect. In the case of being hit, the combination of symbols of the falling symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line, and the medal is not paid out, and if it is high RT gaming state (RT1), it shifts to low RT gaming state (RT0) (RT0) Will fall). In addition, each symbol which constitutes combination of symbols of a specific small combination, a special small combination and a falling symbol is suitably arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the reels 203L, 203C, 203R so that such stop control can be performed.

  In the low RT gaming state (RT0) and the high RT gaming state (RT1), the special small role player 1 defines a lottery value “8” and is elected with a probability of 8/65536. In addition, during the bonus internal winning (RT2), the lottery value "16" is defined, and it is won with the probability of 16/65536. Further, in the BB gaming state, a lottery value “0” is defined, and in the BB gaming state, it is not won. The bonus value is different between the low RT gaming state (RT0) and the high RT gaming state (RT1) and the bonus internal winning (RT2) in the bonus internal winning (RT2). In the winning number 15, the lottery value "8" of the special small winning combination 1 which should have been won in the winning number 18 is added in the winning number 15 (see FIG. 47). Therefore, in each gaming state (RT0 to RT2) in the normal gaming state, the winning probability of the special small role 1 is substantially constant.

  When the special small winning combination 1 is won, the combination of the special small winning combination 1 is stopped and displayed on the effective line (the special small winning combination 1 is established) regardless of the pressing order and the pressing position (pushing order, pressing position regardless). Three medals are paid out. In addition, each symbol which comprises the combination of the symbol of special small part 1 is suitably arrange | positioned on the outer peripheral surface of reel 203L, 203C, 203R so that such stop control can be performed. As described above, when the special small winning combination 1 is won in the normal section, the advantageous section start condition (the advantageous section start condition A) is satisfied, and the process shifts to the advantageous section.

  In the low RT gaming state (RT0) and the high RT gaming state (RT1), the special small winning combination 2 defines a lottery value “609” and is won with a probability of 609/65536. In addition, during the bonus internal winning (RT2), the lottery value "841" is defined, and the player wins with the probability of 841/65536. Further, in the BB gaming state, a lottery value “0” is defined, and in the BB gaming state, it is not won. The lottery values are different between the low RT gaming state (RT0) and the high RT gaming state (RT1) and the bonus internal winning (RT2) because the winning number 19 is the same as the special small winning combination 1 described above. This is because the lottery value “232” of the special small winning combination 2 which should have been elected originally is added to the winning number 16 (see FIG. 47). Therefore, in each gaming state (RT0 to RT2) in the normal gaming state, the winning probability of the special small bonus 2 is substantially constant.

  When the special small winning combination 2 is won, the combination of the special small winning combination 2 is stopped and displayed on the effective line (the special small winning combination 2 is established) regardless of the pressing order and the pressing position (pushing order, pressing position regardless). Three medals are paid out. In addition, each symbol which comprises the combination of the symbol of special small part 2 is suitably arrange | positioned on the outer peripheral surface of reel 203L, 203C, 203R so that such stop control can be performed.

  In the middle and middle BB, the lottery value “0” is defined in the normal gaming state (low RT gaming state (RT0), high RT gaming state (RT1), and bonus internal winning (RT2)), and the normal gaming state is won do not do. In addition, in the BB gaming state, a lottery value "65536" is defined, and it is won with a probability of 65536/65536 (that is, always).

  When the BB small and medium winning combination is won, regardless of the pushing order and the pressing position (pushing order, pressing position unquestioned), the combination of symbols of the BB middle and small winning combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line (BB small and medium winning combination established) The medal is paid out. In addition, each symbol which comprises the combination of the symbol of BB middle and small part is suitably arrange | positioned on the outer peripheral surface of reel 203L, 203C, 203R so that such stop control can be performed.

  In the low RT gaming state (RT0) and the high RT gaming state (RT1), the special small winning combination 1 + BB is defined as a lottery value “8” and is won with a probability of 8/65536. Further, the lottery value "0" is defined in the bonus internal winning (RT2) and the BB gaming state, and the bonus internal winning (RT2) and the BB gaming state are not won.

  When the special small winning combination 1 + BB is won, the combination of the special small winning combination 1 is stopped and displayed on the effective line (special small winning combination 1 established) regardless of the pressing order and pressed position (pushing order, pressed position regardless). Three medals are paid out and BB is carried over to the next game as a carryover role. In addition, in the pachislot machine 2b, when the small combination (for example, special small combination 1) and the bonus combination (for example, BB) are won in duplicate, the small combination is prioritized over the bonus combination. Stop control is performed to be displayed. In addition, similarly, when the replay role (for example, normal replay) and the bonus role (for example, BB) are won in duplicate, the stop is performed so that the replay role is prioritized and displayed over the bonus role. Control is performed. Further, as described above, when the special small winning combination 1 + BB is won in the normal section, the advantageous section start condition (favorable section start condition B) is satisfied, and the standby section is transitioned to the advantageous section.

  In the low RT gaming state (RT0) and the high RT gaming state (RT1), the special small role 2 + BB defines a lottery value “232” and is won with a probability of 232/65536. Further, the lottery value "0" is defined in the bonus internal winning (RT2) and the BB gaming state, and the bonus internal winning (RT2) and the BB gaming state are not won.

  When the special small winning combination 2 + BB is won, regardless of the pushing order and the pressing position (pushing order, pressing position no question), the combination of the special small winning combination 2 is stopped and displayed on the effective line (special small winning combination 2 established), Three medals are paid out, and BB is carried over to the next game as a carry over role (bonus internal winning (carry over)).

  In the low RT gaming state (RT0) and the high RT gaming state (RT1), a single BB has a lottery value of "16" and is won with a probability of 16/65536. Further, the lottery value "0" is defined in the bonus internal winning (RT2) and the BB gaming state, and the bonus internal winning (RT2) and the BB gaming state are not won.

  When a single BB is won, if the stop operation is performed at the correct position of the pressed position, the symbol combination of BB is stopped and displayed on the effective line (BB is established), but there is no payout of medals, but next time Transition from the game to the BB gaming state. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed at the timing when the pressed position is incorrect, the combination of symbols of BB is not stopped and displayed on the activated line, and BB is carried over to the next game as a carryover combination (bonus internal winning ( Carry over)). The same is true for a game in which BB is carried over as a carryover role. In addition, each symbol which comprises the combination of symbols of BB is suitably arrange | positioned on the outer peripheral surface of reel 203L, 203C, 203R so that such stop control can be performed.

<Main control processing of the pachislot machine according to the first specification example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the main control processing of the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the first specification example will be described. The main control process shown in FIG. 48 is executed by the main CPU 231.

  First, when the power is turned on to the pachislot machine 2b, the main CPU 231 executes a power-on process (S210). In this power-on process, it is determined whether the backup data backed up at power-off is normal, whether the setting value has been changed (setting change), etc., and the initialization process according to the determination result is executed. . For example, when the backup data is normal and the setting change is not performed, the main CPU 231 restores the pachislot gaming machine 2b to the power-off state. When the backup data is normal and the setting is changed, all storage areas are initialized as processing at the time of setting change. In addition, when the backup data is not normal, the progress of the game is waited (disabled) until a setting change is newly made.

  Although not shown, in step S210, the main CPU 231 generates initialization command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 271 to the sub control circuit 272, and the communication in which the generated initialization command data is allocated to the main RAM 233 Store in the data storage area. That is, the main CPU 231 performs processing of generating and storing an initialization command. The initialization command is, for example, a command for enabling the sub CPU 281 to recognize information such as the presence or absence of the setting value change and the setting value.

  Here, the initialization command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub CPU 281 in a timer interrupt process (periodic interrupt process) (not shown) executed by the main CPU 231. The same applies to various commands described below. However, the mode of command transmission is not limited to this. For example, interrupt processing may be generated triggered by data being stored in the communication data storage area, and stored command data may be transmitted to the sub CPU 281.

  Next, the main CPU 231 executes initialization processing at the end of one game (one unit game) (S211). In this initialization process, a storage area designated in advance to be initialized at the end of one game is initialized. For example, a process of clearing data stored in an area storing data indicating the internal winning combination in the main RAM 233 or an area storing data indicating the combination of displayed symbols (display combination) is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 231 executes medal acceptance / start check processing (S212). In this medal acceptance / start check process, the medal inserted by the player is detected, and the inserted medal is the number of cards which can start the game, or when there is an automatic insertion request described later. Enable detection of the player's start operation. Specifically, the main CPU 231 controls the start switch 206S to a state in which the start operation can be detected. Then, when the start operation is performed, the main CPU 231 prohibits the reception of the medal, and shifts the processing to S213.

  Although not shown, in step S 212, the main CPU 231 generates medal insertion command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 271 to the sub control circuit 272, and the communication in which the generated medal insertion command data is allocated to the main RAM 233 Store in the data storage area. That is, the main CPU 231 generates and stores a medal insertion command. Here, the medal insertion command is a command for enabling the sub CPU 281 to recognize information such as the presence or absence of medal insertion, the value of the number of inserted cards, and the value of the number of credits.

  Next, the main CPU 231 extracts necessary random number values and stores them in the random number value storage area allocated to the main RAM 233 (S213). In the present embodiment, at least a random number value (random number value for lottery) used in an internal lottery process described later is extracted from 0 to 65535 and stored.

  Next, the main CPU 231 executes an internal lottery process (S214-1). In this internal lottery process, an internal lottery table corresponding to the gaming state and the number of inserted cards is set, and a lottery value defined in each winning number is sequentially subtracted from stored random number values (random number values for lottery). Processing is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a negative value, the internal winning combination corresponding to the winning number when the negative value is obtained is determined as the internal winning combination in the current game. On the other hand, if the subtraction result does not become a negative value even if the lottery values defined for all the winning numbers are subtracted, a loss is determined as an internal winning combination in the current game. When BB is carried over, BB is combined with the internal winning combination determined as the processing result described above, and the internal winning combination is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 231 executes advantageous period control processing at the start of the game (S215-1). In this game start time advantageous zone control process, if the current game zone is an advantageous zone, the number of games in the advantageous zone is counted ("1" is added per one game), and the counting result is the advantageous zone end condition. When it becomes established (when the number of games in the advantageous section becomes "1500"), processing for ending the advantageous section is performed. In addition, if the current game section is a normal section, it is determined based on the determined internal winning combination whether an advantageous section start condition (advantage section start condition A or advantageous section start condition B) is satisfied, If it is determined that the advantageous section start condition is established, processing for starting the advantageous section from the next game (or after the standby section has elapsed) is performed.

  Although not shown, in step S215-1, the main CPU 231 generates a rendering state command for transmission from the main control circuit 271 to the sub control circuit 272, and allocates the generated rendering state command data to the main RAM 233. Store in the stored communication data storage area. That is, the main CPU 231 performs processing for generating and storing a rendering state command. Here, the effect status command includes, for example, the type of the current game section, the result of counting the number of games played in the advantageous section when the current game section is the advantageous section, and the case where the current game section is the advantageous section It is a command for enabling the sub CPU 281 to recognize information such as instruction information based on the determined internal winning combination.

  The “instruction information” is information for causing the sub CPU 281 to recognize the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player according to the internal winning combination. In the pachislo gaming machine 2b of this example, the main CPU 231 controls whether the game section is to be a normal section or an advantageous section, and at the same time, it is controlled by the main CPU 231 which procedure of stop operation is reported in the advantageous section. It is managed by control.

  Therefore, the main CPU 231 transmits an effect state command including instruction information to the sub CPU 281 when the current game section is the advantageous section, so that the sub CPU 281 side corrects the pressing order (according to the internal winning combination) ( 47) can be recognized, and a stop operation notification effect in which an appropriate stop operation procedure is notified can be performed by, for example, a display mode on the liquid crystal display device 205, while the present If the game section of is a normal section, by transmitting an effect state command not including instruction information to the sub CPU 281, the sub CPU 281 side becomes a pressing order correct answer (see FIG. 47) according to the internal winning combination. The stop operation order is made unrecognizable, so that the stop operation notification effect described above can not be executed. As a result, for example, even if the sub-control circuit 272 side performs some fraudulent acts or an abnormality occurs, the main control circuit 271 can appropriately manage the advantageous section.

  The main CPU 231 transmits “1” as instruction information indicating the correct push order (123), for example, when the current game section is the advantageous section and the push order replay 1 or the push order small part 1 is won, When the order replay 2 or the push order small prize 2 is won, "2" is transmitted as instruction information indicating the push order correct answer (132), and when the push order replay 3 or the push order small prize 3 is won, the push order correct answer When "3" is transmitted as instruction information indicating (213) and the push order replay 4 or push order small part 4 is won, "4" is transmitted as instruction information indicating the push order correct answer (231), and the push order is transmitted. When Replay 5 or Push Order Small Combination 5 is won, “5” is transmitted as instruction information indicating the push order correct answer (312), and when Push Order Replay 6 or Push Order Small Combination 6 is won, the Push Order Corrective And instruction information indicating Te transmits a "6".

  The mode of the instruction information is not limited to the one described above, and can be set as appropriate. That is, any information may be used as long as the sub CPU 281 can recognize which stop operation procedure is the stop operation procedure advantageous to the player. Also, the mode of transmission of the instruction information is not limited to that described above. For example, it is possible to transmit a rendering state command including instruction information in the case of an advantageous section, but not to transmit a rendering state command in the case of a normal section. For example, if it is an advantageous section, it sends an effect state command including instruction information, while if it is a normal section, it is a type of combination (ie, whether it is a replay combination or a small combination, or a bonus combination) Or, it is also possible to transmit a rendering state command including winning type information that causes only recognition.

  Further, the instruction information may not only be transmitted to the sub CPU 281 side, but may be notified directly by the control of the main CPU 231. Specifically, for example, in the 7-segment display 213, an instruction information display area for displaying instruction information may be configured, and the above-described instruction information may be digitally displayed to the player. Further, the instruction information display area may be provided at an arbitrary location of the front door 202 separately from the 7-segment display 213. In this case, the instruction information display area is separately configured as an instruction information display. In this case, another light source (for example, an LED or the like) may be used as the indication information display without using 7 segments.

  Next, the main CPU 231 executes reel stop initial setting processing (S216). In the reel stop initial setting process, various stop control information of the reels 203L, 203C, 203R described above is stored in the corresponding area of the main RAM 233 based on the result of the internal lottery process (internal winning combination).

  Next, the main CPU 231 generates start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 271 to the sub control circuit 272, and stores the generated start command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 233 (S217). That is, the main CPU 231 performs processing of generating and storing a start command. The start command is, for example, type of internal winning combination, type of gaming state, presence or absence of lock execution, contents thereof, bonus gaming state (for example, BB gaming state in the first specification example, MB gaming state in the second specification example described later) It is a command for enabling the sub CPU 281 to recognize information such as the cumulative payout number of medals paid out and the cumulative payout number of medals paid out in the advantageous section.

  Next, the main CPU 231 executes lock execution processing at the game start (S218). In this game start time lock execution process, control is performed to invalidate the game operation (for example, the stop operation) of the player for a predetermined period based on the establishment of various lock execution conditions.

  Next, the main CPU 231 executes wait processing (S219). In this weight processing, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the previous game start (the start of the last unit game), and if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the predetermined time has elapsed The waiting time to wait until you are digested. The predetermined time in this weight processing, that is, the weight time, is set to, for example, 4.1 seconds from the start of the last unit game.

  Next, the main CPU 231 executes reel rotation start processing (S220). In this reel rotation start processing, processing for requesting the start of rotation of all the reels 203L, 203C, 203R is executed. Note that control of rotation start / rotation maintenance / rotation stop of the reel is executed in a timer interrupt process (not shown) executed by the main CPU 231.

  In this timer interrupt process, the rotation of the reels 203L, 203C, 203R is started by controlling the driving of the stepping motors 249L, 249C, 249R, and the rotation of the reels 203L, 203C, 203R is constant (for example, 80). Accelerated to reach spin / one minute). Thereafter, when the rotation of the reels 203L, 203C, 203R reaches a constant speed, the constant speed rotation is maintained. When the rotation of the reels 203L, 203C, and 203R reaches a constant speed and the above-described reel index is detected, the stop operation on the stop buttons 207L, 207C, and 207R is permitted.

  Although not shown, in step S220, the main CPU 231 generates reel rotation start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 271 to the sub control circuit 272, and the generated reel rotation start command data is allocated to the main RAM 233. Store in the communication data storage area. That is, the main CPU 231 generates and stores a reel rotation start command. The reel rotation start command is, for example, a command for enabling the sub CPU 281 to recognize that the rotation of the reels 203L, 203C, and 203R has been started.

  Next, the main CPU 231 executes reel stop control processing (S221). In this reel stop control processing, stop control of the reels 203L, 203C, and 203R is performed based on the gaming state, the internal winning combination, the stop control information, and the player's stop operation. Here, in this example, in the normal gaming state and the BB gaming state (the first specification example), stop control is performed within the range of the maximum number of sliding symbol number symbols for all the reels 203L, 203C, 203R, MB In the gaming state (the second specification example), stop control is performed within the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols figure 1 for at least one of the reels 203L, 203C, 203R.

  Although illustration is omitted, in step S221, the main CPU 231 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 271 to the sub control circuit 272, and the communication in which the generated reel stop command data is allocated to the main RAM 233 Store in the data storage area. That is, the main CPU 231 generates and stores a reel stop command. The reel stop command indicates the type of reel to be stopped, the stop start position (that is, the symbol position when the stop button is operated) and the number of sliding symbols or the planned stop position (that is, the symbol position at which the reel is actually stopped). And the like) can be recognized by the sub CPU 281.

  Next, the main CPU 231 executes a winning search process (S222). In this prize search process, whether or not the combination of symbols displayed on the activated line (display combination) is a combination of symbols relating to a predetermined prize or the like after all the reels 203L, 203C, 203R have stopped. Is judged.

  Although not shown, in step S222, the main CPU 231 generates winning operation command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 271 to the sub control circuit 272, and the communication assigned the generated winning operation command data to the main RAM 233. Store in the data storage area. That is, the main CPU 231 generates and stores a winning operation command. The prize operation command is a command for enabling the sub CPU 281 to recognize information such as, for example, the type of display combination and the number of payouts (or the operation of replay and bonus).

  Next, when the main CPU 231 determines that the combination of the symbols of the small winning combination is displayed on the activated line as a result of the winning search processing, the medal payout to pay out the number of medals according to the type of the small winning combination A process is performed (S223). In this medal payout process, the payout process of the medals by the driving of the hopper 240 and the addition process of the credit number are performed based on the payout number.

  Next, the main CPU 231 executes an RT gaming state update process (S224-1). In this RT gaming state update process, a process of updating the RT gaming state is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined transition trigger of the RT gaming state.

  In the Pachi-Slot gaming machine 2b according to the first specification example, when the RT gaming state is the low RT gaming state (RT0), when the rising replay is established, the high RT gaming state (RT1) is shifted to BB. If the player wins, the bonus internal win is made (RT2). In addition, when the RT gaming state is the high RT gaming state (RT1), when the descent replay or the descent symbol is established, it shifts to the low RT gaming state (RT0), and when the BB is won, the bonus internal is won Move to medium (RT2). In addition, when the BB gaming state ends, it shifts to the low RT gaming state (RT0).

  Next, the main CPU 231 executes bonus end check processing (S225-1). In this bonus end check process, the BB gaming state is ended when the ending condition (in this example, the fact that there is a payout exceeding "240" sheets) in the BB gaming state is satisfied.

  Although illustration is omitted, when ending the BB gaming state in step S225-1, the main CPU 231 generates bonus end command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 271 to the sub control circuit 272, and the generated bonus ends. Command data is stored in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 233. That is, the main CPU 231 generates and stores a bonus end command. The bonus end command is a command for enabling the sub CPU 281 to recognize information such as the end of the BB gaming state, for example.

  Next, the main CPU 231 executes bonus operation check processing (S226-1). In this bonus operation check process, the BB gaming state is started when the BB gaming state start condition (BB establishment) is satisfied in the normal gaming state (during bonus internal winning (RT2)). In addition, when the operating conditions for replay (normal replay, ascending replay and descending replay) are satisfied, an automatic insertion request is made to activate the replay in the next game.

  Although illustration is omitted, when the BB gaming state is started in step S226-1, the main CPU 231 generates bonus start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 271 to the sub control circuit 272, and the generated bonus start Command data is stored in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 233. That is, the main CPU 231 generates and stores a bonus start command. The bonus start command is a command for enabling the sub CPU 281 to recognize information such as, for example, the type of bonus started (one type in the first specification example) and the start of the BB gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 231 executes advantageous period control processing at the end of the game (S227-1). In this game end time advantageous area control process, for example, when starting an advantageous area from the next game, control is performed to light the above-mentioned section display area (area indicator), and the advantageous area is ended in the current game In this case, control is performed to turn off the section display area (section indicator) described above. Note that, as described above, the timing at which the section display area (section indicator) is turned on and off is not limited to the timing, and can be set as appropriate.

  Next, the main CPU 231 executes a game end lock execution process (S228). In this game end-time lock execution process, based on the establishment of various lock execution conditions, control is executed to invalidate the player's game operation (for example, insertion operation or start operation) over a predetermined period. Ru. After executing the processing of step S228, the main CPU 231 returns to the processing of step S211.

[Second specification example of a gaming machine to which a gaming display device (gaming device) according to the first to ninth embodiments is connected]
Next, a second specification example of the gaming machine to which the gaming display device (gaming device) according to the above-described first to ninth embodiments is connected will be described with reference to FIGS. Also in this example, the pachislot machine 2b is described as an example of the game machine. In the present example, the description of the same contents as those of the first specification example will be omitted.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram showing the transition of the gaming state of the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example, and FIG. 50 is a diagram showing the configuration of the internal winning combination of the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a main control process of the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example.

<Transition of the game state of the pachislot machine according to the second specification example>
First, with reference to FIG. 49, the transition of the gaming state of the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example will be described. As shown in FIG. 49, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example, the first advantageous section and the second advantageous section, which are gaming sections that are relatively advantageous for the player, as a state where the player plays a game It comprises a section and a normal section which is a game section relatively disadvantageous to the player than the first and second advantageous sections.

  As in the first specification example, the first advantageous section and the second advantageous section are relatively advantageous game sections in that the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous for the player can be notified, and the normal section is As in the second specification example, the game section is relatively disadvantageous in that the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player can not be notified.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 46, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the first specification example, the MB gaming state (specific gaming state) which is relatively advantageous for the player as the gaming state is relative to the player. And a normal gaming state that is disadvantageous to. Also, the MB gaming state is transitioned based on the establishment of MB1, which will be described later (the first specific gaming state), and the MB2 gaming state, which is transitioned based on the establishment of MB2 described later (the second Specific game state).

  In the normal gaming state, a low RT gaming state (RT0) having the lowest probability of winning the replay character, a high RT gaming state (RT2) having the highest probability of winning the replay character, a low RT probability of the replay character The medium RT gaming state (RT1) is higher than the gaming state (RT0) and lower than the high RT gaming state (RT2). In contrast to the normal gaming state, the high RT gaming state (RT2) is most advantageous for the player, and then the middle RT gaming state (RT1) is advantageous for the player, and the low RT gaming state (RT0). ) Is the most disadvantageous for the player. In the pachislot machine 2b according to the second specification example, the high RT gaming state (RT2) is the above-described specific RT gaming state.

  The MB gaming state (specific gaming state) is relatively advantageous in the sense that the probability of winning a medal paying out role (in this example, a small winning combination) in which medals will be paid out to the player is higher than that in the normal gaming state. The game state is normal (see FIG. 50), and the normal game state is relative in the sense that the probability of winning this medal payout combination (in this example, a small combination in this example) is lower than that of the MB gaming state (specific gaming state). The gaming state is disadvantageous to (see FIG. 50).

  However, in the MB gaming state (specific gaming state), as described above, in at least one of the reels 203L, 203C, and 203R, the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols is from 4 symbols to 1 symbol Decrease. Therefore, since the timing at which the player's stop operation can be an appropriate timing (can be a pressed position correct answer) is also reduced, the fluctuation range of the obtained profit is increased according to the skill of the player's stop operation.

(Transition in the normal section)
The player usually starts playing in the normal gaming state in the normal section. More specifically, the game is started from the low RT gaming state (RT0). As described above, in the normal section, since the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, the transition from the low RT gaming state (RT0) to the middle RT gaming state (RT1) or the high RT gaming state (RT2) is made. Although the probability is low, when the first push order replay or the second push order replay is elected as described later, and the ascending order correct answer described later is established, the low RT gaming state is established. The transition from (RT0) to the middle RT gaming state (RT1) or the high RT gaming state (RT2) is made. However, it is difficult to keep on pressing correctly by accident, and when the first push order replay or the second push order replay is selected as described later, the push order is incorrect and the downward play 1 or the downward play 2 described later is established. Or, if the pushing order small winning combination is the pushing order incorrect and the pushing position incorrect answer and the below-mentioned falling symbol is established, the middle RT gaming state (RT1) or the high RT gaming state (RT2) ) To the low RT gaming state (RT0).

  In addition, in the normal gaming state (low RT gaming state (RT0), middle RT gaming state (RT1), and high RT gaming state (RT2)), MB1 (first specific combination) or MB2 (second identification) described later When the combination of symbols of the winning MB is stopped and displayed on the activated line (MB1 formation or MB2 formation), it is decided from the normal gaming state to the MB1 gaming state (the first specific gaming state) ) Or shift to the MB2 gaming state (second specific gaming state). Here, in this example, MB1 and MB2 are always established in the winning game (that is, the corresponding symbol combination may be stopped and displayed on the activated line regardless of the mode of the stopping operation in the winning game). It is configured. However, as in the case of BB in the first specification example, it may not be established when an appropriate stop operation is not performed, and it may be carried over as a "carrying over combination."

  In addition, in the MB gaming state (specific gaming state), when the number of medals exceeding the predetermined payout number of medals is paid out, the MB gaming state ends (MB1 end or MB2 end), from the MB gaming state The transition to the normal gaming state (more specifically, the RT gaming state before shifting to the MB gaming state) is performed. In the present example, the predetermined number of medals paid out is set to “9”.

  In addition, in the normal gaming state (low RT gaming state (RT0), middle RT gaming state (RT1), and high RT gaming state (RT2)), when it is elected to MB1 (first specific part) described later, the first The advantageous section start condition of is satisfied (the advantageous section start condition A is satisfied), and the section display area (section indicator) lights up at an arbitrary timing until the start of the next unit game and it is informed that it shifts to the advantageous section At the same time, the transition from the next unit game to the MB1 gaming state of the first advantageous section is made.

  In addition, in the normal gaming state (low RT gaming state (RT0), middle RT gaming state (RT1), and high RT gaming state (RT2)), the second advantageous zone start condition when a special small combination as described later is won. Is established (advantage zone start condition B established), the section display area (section indicator) lights up at an arbitrary timing until the start of the next unit game, and it is informed that transition to the advantageous section will be made, and the next unit The game transitions to the normal gaming state of the second advantageous section from the game.

(Transition in the first advantageous section)
The first advantageous section is configured by the MB1 gaming state (first specific gaming state) of the advantageous section. The first advantageous section ends when the MB1 gaming state is ended (MB1 end) (the advantageous section end condition A is satisfied). That is, only in the MB1 gaming state, it is an advantageous section in which the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified.

  Here, in the MB1 gaming state (the same applies to the MB2 gaming state), the MB small and medium-sized winning combination described below is always determined as the internal winning combination, and the winning probability in the normal gaming state is the same for the replay role. The lottery is carried over to be able to be determined as an internal winning combination with MB small and medium winning combination (see FIG. 50). And, in the first game of the MB1 gaming state, when the MB medium and small winning combination is won in repetition with the push order replay (first push order replay 1 to 6 and second push order replay 1 to 6 described later), the game If the player performs an appropriate stop operation, it is possible to establish a specific small combination to be described later and pay out nine medals (as the MB1 gaming state does not end in the first game), the MB1 gaming state 2 While the game can be extended to the second game, if the player further performs an appropriate stop operation in the second game of the MB gaming state, the MB medium and small combination described below is established to pay out 10 medals. The most medals can be paid out (see FIG. 50).

  In the first advantageous section, the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player until the end of the first advantageous section (ie, until the end of the MB1 gaming mode) so that the most medals can be paid out in the MB1 gaming mode ) Is informed. For example, in the first game of the MB1 gaming state, the procedure of the stopping operation for establishing a specific small winning combination described later (that is, the procedure of the stopping operation that the pressing order is correct and the pressing position is correct) is notified. In the second game of, the procedure of the stop operation for establishing MB medium and small winning combination described later (that is, the procedure of the stop operation to be the press position correct, or the procedure of the stop operation to be the press order incorrect and the press position correct) Is notified. However, for example, in the first game of the MB1 gaming state, when neither the specific small part nor the medium or small part of MB described below is established (that is, when a drop occurs due to a pressing position incorrect answer) In the second game, a procedure of a stop operation for establishing a specific small combination to be described later is notified. That is, in the first advantageous section, on the assumption that the medals have been paid out first (assuming that the winning order has been won), the procedure of the stop operation for establishing the specific small winning combination described later is notified. Next, in the game where medals can be paid out, the procedure of the stop operation for establishing the MB medium and small combination described later is informed.

  In addition, in the first game of MB1 gaming state, when the middle / small / middle winning combination is won alone, or when it is won in duplicate with a replay role other than push order replay (for example, normal replay), how to stop Even if an operation is performed, a specific small combination described later is not established, and in this case, a procedure of a stop operation for establishing an MB medium small combination described later (that is, a procedure of the stop operation to be correct in pressed position) is notified Be done.

(Transition in second advantageous section)
The second advantageous section is composed of the normal gaming state of the advantageous section and the MB gaming state (specific gaming state). In the second advantageous section, regardless of whether the second advantageous section is in the normal gaming state or in the MB gaming state (specific gaming state), the number of games determined in advance after the second advantageous It ends when the game of period) is performed (advantage zone end condition B establishment). In the present example, the second advantageous section ends when "50" games have been played. However, in this example, this game period is an initial game period to be granted first when shifting to the second advantageous zone, and when the predetermined extension condition is satisfied in the second advantageous zone, the game period Is extended (i.e., the number of games played by the second advantageous section is added).

  For example, in the second advantageous section, a specific small combination or MB1 described later is determined as the internal winning combination, and a predetermined additional lottery is performed, and the lottery result extends the gaming period of the second advantageous section. If it is a game, the game period of the second advantageous section is extended according to the lottery result. In the second advantageous section, when a specific small combination or MB1 described later is determined as the internal winning combination, the game period of the second advantageous section may be extended without passing through a predetermined additional lottery. .

  In this example, when MB1 described later is determined as the internal winning combination in the second advantageous section, the second advantageous section is continued without shifting to the first advantageous section. This is because the playing period is longer in the second advantageous section than in the first advantageous section. That is, the second advantageous section is more specifically composed of the normal gaming state of the advantageous section, the MB1 gaming state (first specified gaming state), and the MB2 gaming state (second specified gaming state). However, when MB1 described later is determined as the internal winning combination in the second advantageous section, the second advantageous section may be ended to shift to the first advantageous section (that is, the advantageous section may be overwritten). In FIG. 49, see the arrow of a dashed dotted line). In this way, the degree of advantage differs according to the timing at which the later-described MB1 is determined as the internal winning combination, so that the game characteristics can be diversified. As described above, in the present example, the second advantageous section can also be configured by the normal gaming state of the advantageous section and the MB2 gaming state (second specific gaming state).

  When the advantageous section start condition B is established from the low RT gaming state (RT0) of the normal section and transition is made to the second advantageous section, transition is made to the low RT gaming state (RT0) of the second advantageous section. When the advantageous section start condition B is established from the middle RT gaming state (RT1) and the transition to the second advantageous section is made, the transition to the middle RT gaming state (RT1) of the second advantageous section is made, and the high RT gaming of the normal section is performed. When the advantageous section start condition B is satisfied from the state (RT2) and the process shifts to the second advantageous section, the process shifts to the high RT gaming state (RT2) of the second advantageous section. Here, as described above, in the second advantageous section, since the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player is notified, as long as the stop operation is performed according to the notification, when the push order replay is won, the push order is correct When the below-mentioned rise Replay 1 and rise Replay 2 are established and it is in the low RT gaming state (RT0), it shifts from the low RT gaming state (RT0) to the middle RT gaming state (RT1), and the middle RT gaming state In the case of the state (RT1), the medium RT gaming state (RT1) is shifted to the high RT gaming state (RT2). Also, in the high RT gaming state (RT2), the high RT gaming state (RT2) is maintained.

  In addition, when the pushing order small part winning, it becomes the pushing order correct answer becomes the specific small part combination which it mentions later is formed, it means that the medal which is most to the player is paid out. Further, in the MB gaming state in the advantageous section (MB1 and MB2 gaming states), as described above, it is possible to receive payout of the most medals in the MB gaming state.

  In the present example, the second advantageous section starts when the advantageous section start condition B is established, and when the gaming period is extended, the extended gaming period ends or the gaming period is not extended. Is continued until the end of the initial game period (50 times) (that is, until the advantageous section end condition B is established), but the advantageous section end condition is not limited thereto. . For example, as described above, the game period may be managed by the difference number or the number of times of notification. In addition, even if the game period of the second advantageous section is extended, if the gaming period of the second advantageous section reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, 1,500 games) From the viewpoint of suppression, the second advantageous section may be forcibly ended to shift to the normal gaming state.

  Further, in the present example, during the MB gaming state (specific gaming state), as described later, when the winning order replay is won, a specific small winning combination is established if the pressing order is correct and the pressing position is correct. And if the pressed position is correct, MB small and medium winning combination is established, and if the pressed position is incorrect, a dropout occurs, but the mode of stop control in the MB gaming state (specific gaming state) is limited to this. is not. For example, when winning in push-order replay, regardless of the pressed position (that is, regardless of the timing of the stop operation), a specific small winning combination is established if the pushing order is correct, and MB medium small winning combination if the pushing order is incorrect May be established. Further, for example, when winning in the push order replay, regardless of the push order (that is, the push order is unquestioned), the specific small combination is established if the pressed position is correct, and the MB middle small combination is established if the pressed position is incorrect You may do it.

  In addition, for example, during the MB gaming state (specific gaming state), regardless of whether or not the winning order replay is won (that is, regardless of the presence or type of the internal winning combination winning in duplicate with MB small and medium winning combination) If the pressing order correct and the pressing position correct, the specific small winning combination is established, if the pressing order incorrect and the pressing position correct, the MB medium small winning combination is established, and if the pressing position incorrect answer, the omission occurs. It is also good. Also in this case, regardless of the pressed position (that is, regardless of the timing of the stop operation), the specific small winning combination is established if the pushing order is correct, and the MB small and medium winning combination is established if the pushing order is incorrect However, regardless of the push order (that is, the push order is unquestioned), the specific small combination may be established if the pressed position is correct, and the MB medium small combination may be established if the pressed position is incorrect. .

<Configuration of internal winning combination of pachislot machine according to the second specification example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the configuration of the internal winning combination of the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example will be described. FIG. 50 shows an internal lottery table used to determine an internal winning combination in an internal lottery process (see S214-2 in FIG. 51) described later.

  As shown in FIG. 50, the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example has, as an internal winning combination, a normal replay, a first push-order replay 1 to 6, a second push-order replay 1 to 6, a normal small winning combination, and a push. It is equipped with order minors 1 to 6, special minors, MB medium minors, MB1 and MB2. In FIG. 50, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example, a specific set value (for example, set value "1") is set, and "3" medals in the normal gaming state and the MB gaming state Shows an internal lottery table to be referred to when the player is inserted.

  In normal replay, a lottery value “4490” is defined in the low RT gaming state (RT0) and the middle RT gaming state (RT1), and the player is elected with the probability of 4490/65536. Further, in the high RT gaming state (RT2), a lottery value “35977” is defined, and the player wins with a probability of 35977/65536. The lottery value fluctuates in accordance with the set value. Specifically, the lottery value of the normal small winning combination, which will be described later, increases as the set value increases (the value increases), and decreases (the value decreases). In addition, in the MB gaming state, the lottery value in the RT gaming state before transition is taken over and the lottery is performed. The same applies to the first push order replay 1 to 6 and the second push order replay 1 to 6 shown below. However, the replay role is not established in the MB gaming state. That is, when the replay combination and the small combination are won in duplicate in the MB gaming state, the stop control is performed such that the small combination is preferentially displayed in a stopped state rather than the replay combination. Note that stop control may be performed so that the replay combination can be stopped and displayed according to the pushing order or the pressed position, etc. With regard to a specific replay combination (for example, normal replay), it is more relevant than the small combination. The stop control may be performed so that the replay role is preferentially stopped and displayed.

  When the player wins the normal replay, in the gaming state other than the MB gaming state, regardless of the pressing order and the pressed position (that is, the timing when the player performs the stop operation) (pushing order, pressed position unquestioned), the symbol of the normal replay Is displayed stopped on the effective line (normally, replay is established). In addition, each symbol which comprises the combination of the symbol of normal replay is suitably arrange | positioned on the outer peripheral surface of reel 203L, 203C, 203R so that such stop control can be performed.

  In the first push-order replays 1 to 6, in the low RT gaming state (RT0), a lottery value “748” is defined, and the player wins with a probability of 748/65536. In the middle RT gaming state (RT1) and the high RT gaming state (RT2), a lottery value "0" is defined, and the middle RT gaming state (RT1) and the high RT gaming state (RT2) do not win.

  When the first push order replay 1 is won, and the stop operation is performed with the push order correct (123), the combination of the symbols of the rise replay 1 is stopped and displayed on the effective line (with any pressed position). (Raise Replay 1 established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with the pressing order incorrect answer, the combination of the symbols of the descent replay (with no concern on the pressed position) is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descent replay established).

  When the first push order replay 2 is won, if the stop operation is performed with the push order correct (132), the combination of the symbols of the rise replay 1 is stopped and displayed on the effective line (with no pressing position). (Raise Replay 1 established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with the pressing order incorrect answer, the combination of the symbols of the descent replay (with no concern on the pressed position) is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descent replay established).

  When the first push order Replay 3 is won, and the stop operation is performed with the push order correct (213), the combination of symbols of the rise Replay 1 is stopped and displayed on the effective line (with no pressing position). (Raise Replay 1 established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with the pressing order incorrect answer, the combination of the symbols of the descent replay (with no concern on the pressed position) is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descent replay established).

  When the first push order replay 4 is won, and when the stop operation is performed with the push order correct (231), the combination of symbols of the rise replay 1 is stopped and displayed on the effective line (with no pressing position). (Raise Replay 1 established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with the pressing order incorrect answer, the combination of the symbols of the descent replay (with no concern on the pressed position) is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descent replay established).

  When the first push order replay 5 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the push order correct (312), the combination of symbols of the rise replay 1 is stopped and displayed on the effective line (with no pressing position question) (Raise Replay 1 established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with the pressing order incorrect answer, the combination of the symbols of the descent replay (with no concern on the pressed position) is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descent replay established).

  When the first push order replay 6 is won, and the stop operation is performed with the push order correct (321), the combination of symbols of the rise replay 1 is stopped and displayed on the effective line (with no pressing position question) (Raise Replay 1 established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with the pressing order incorrect answer, the combination of the symbols of the descent replay (with no concern on the pressed position) is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descent replay established).

  As described above, when the first push order replay 1 to 6 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the push order that is the push order correct, the combination of symbols of the rise replay 1 is on the effective line. The stop display causes the low RT gaming state (RT0) to transition (rise) to the middle RT gaming state (RT1). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed in the push order that causes the push order incorrect, the low RT gaming state (RT0) is maintained by the stop display of the combination of the symbols of the down replay on the activated line. . The respective symbols constituting the combination of the symbols of the ascending replay 1 and the descending replay are appropriately arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the reels 203L, 203C, 203R so that such stop control can be performed.

  In the second push order replays 1 to 6, in the middle RT gaming state (RT1) and the high RT gaming state (RT2), a lottery value “3567” is defined, and the player wins with a probability of 3567/65536. Further, in the low RT gaming state (RT0), the lottery value “0” is defined, and in the low RT gaming state (RT0), the player does not win.

  When the second push order Replay 1 is won, and the stop operation is performed with the push order correct (123), the combination of symbols of the rise Replay 2 is stopped and displayed on the effective line (with any pressed position). (Raise Replay 2 established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with the pressing order incorrect answer, the combination of the symbols of the descent replay (with no concern on the pressed position) is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descent replay established).

  When the second push order Replay 2 is won, and the stop operation is performed with the push order correct (132), the combination of symbols of the rise Replay 2 is stopped and displayed on the effective line (with any pressed position). (Raise Replay 2 established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with the pressing order incorrect answer, the combination of the symbols of the descent replay (with no concern on the pressed position) is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descent replay established).

  When the second push order Replay 3 is won, and the stop operation is performed with the push order correct (213), the combination of symbols of the rise Replay 2 is stopped and displayed on the effective line (with any pressed position). (Raise Replay 2 established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with the pressing order incorrect answer, the combination of the symbols of the descent replay (with no concern on the pressed position) is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descent replay established).

  When the second push order Replay 4 is won, and the stop operation is performed with the push order correct (231), the combination of symbols of the rise Replay 2 is stopped and displayed on the effective line (with any pressed position). (Raise Replay 2 established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with the pressing order incorrect answer, the combination of the symbols of the descent replay (with no concern on the pressed position) is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descent replay established).

  When the second push order replay 5 is won, if the stop operation is performed with the push order correct (312), the combination of the symbols of the rise replay 2 is stopped and displayed on the effective line (without pressing position question) (Raise Replay 2 established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with the pressing order incorrect answer, the combination of the symbols of the descent replay (with no concern on the pressed position) is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descent replay established).

  When the second push order replay 6 is won, if the stop operation is performed with the push order correct (321), the combination of the symbols of the rise replay 2 is stopped and displayed on the effective line (with any pressed position). (Raise Replay 2 established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with the pressing order incorrect answer, the combination of the symbols of the descent replay (with no concern on the pressed position) is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descent replay established).

  In this way, when the second push order Replay 1 to 6 is won, when the stop operation is performed in the push order that is the push order correct, the combination of symbols of the Replay 2 is on the effective line. The stop display causes the medium RT gaming state (RT1) to shift (rise) to the high RT gaming state (RT2), and the high RT gaming state (RT2) is maintained in the high RT gaming state (RT2). . On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed in the push order that causes the push order incorrect, the combination of the symbols of the down replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line, so that the middle RT gaming state (RT1) and the high RT gaming are performed. The state (RT2) is shifted (dropped) to the low RT gaming state (RT0). The respective symbols constituting the combination of the symbols of the ascending replay 2 and the descending replay are appropriately arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the reels 203L, 203C, 203R so that such stop control can be performed.

  In the normal small game, the lottery value "1284" is defined in the normal gaming state (low RT gaming state (RT0), middle RT gaming state (RT1), and high RT gaming state (RT2)), and the probability of 1284/65536 Win at. The lottery value fluctuates in accordance with the set value. Specifically, it is defined that the lottery value increases as the setting value increases (for example, the lottery value is added by “4” each time the setting value is incremented by 1). Further, in the MB gaming state, a lottery value “0” is defined, and in the MB gaming state, it is not won. However, since the MB medium and small winning combination described below is an internal winning combination in which it is permitted that the combination of the symbols of all the small winning combinations defined is stopped and displayed on the activated line, in that sense, in the MB gaming state You can also say that you will win. The same applies to pushing order minors 1 to 6 and other minors.

  It is to be noted that the lottery values of the normal small winning combination and the push order small combination 1 to 6 in the second specification example and the stop control mode are basically the same as those in the first specification example (see FIGS. 47 and 50). ), The explanation is omitted here.

  In the special small game, the lottery value “32” is defined in the normal gaming state (low RT gaming state (RT0), middle RT gaming state (RT1), and high RT gaming state (RT2)), and the probability of 32/65536 Win at.

  When winning a special small combination, regardless of the pushing order and the pressed position (pushing order, pressed position regardless), the combination of special small winning combination symbols is displayed stopped on the effective line (special small winning combination established), 3 pieces The medal is paid out. In addition, each symbol which constitutes a combination of symbols of special small winning combination is suitably arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the reels 203L, 203C, 203R so that such stop control can be performed. Further, as described above, when the special small winning combination is won in the normal section, the advantageous section start condition (the advantageous section start condition B) is satisfied, and the process shifts to the second advantageous section.

  In the MB gaming state (MB1 gaming state and MB2 gaming state), a lottery value "65536" is defined in the MB small / medium winning combination, and the winning combination is won with the probability of 65536/65536. That is, the player is always elected in the MB gaming state. In this example, in the MB gaming state, an internal winning combination of the small and medium-sized combination of MBs is provided so that the combination of the symbols of all the defined small combinations is permitted to be stopped and displayed on the activated line. However, the method of determining the internal winning combination in the MB gaming state is not limited to this. For example, in the internal lottery process (see S214-2 in FIG. 51) described later, the internal winning combination is determined with reference to the internal lottery table according to the current normal gaming state (any one of RT0 to RT2). In the above, it may be possible to execute processing for permitting stop combinations of symbols of all of the small winning combination to be defined on the activated line. In this case, there is no need to separately define the internal winning combination of the MB small and medium winning combination and the internal lottery table used in the MB gaming state, so the free space of the main ROM 232 can be secured.

  In the case where the MB middle and small winning combination is won, and in the case where the first push order replay 1 or the second push order replay 1 is also picked in duplicate, the stop operation is performed when the stop operation is performed in the push order correct (123) If the timing of the operation is appropriate (pressing position correct), the combination of the symbol of the specific small combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line (specific small combination is established), nine medals are paid out, but If the timing is not appropriate (depressed position incorrect answer), a combination of symbols that cause a loss is displayed stopped on the effective line (dropped). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with a push order incorrect answer, if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate timing (pressing position correct), the combination of symbols of MB middle and small winning combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line ( MB small and medium winning combination established, 10 medals are paid out, but if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate timing (pressing position incorrect answer), the combination of the symbols to be lost is stopped and displayed on the effective line (dropped) ).

  In the case where the MB middle and small winning combination is won, and the first push order replay 2 or the second push order replay 2 is also redundantly won, the stop is performed when the stop operation is performed in the push order correct (132) If the timing of the operation is appropriate (pressing position correct), the combination of the symbol of the specific small combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line (specific small combination is established), nine medals are paid out, but If the timing is not appropriate (depressed position incorrect answer), a combination of symbols that cause a loss is displayed stopped on the effective line (dropped). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with a push order incorrect answer, if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate timing (pressing position correct), the combination of symbols of MB middle and small winning combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line ( MB small and medium winning combination established, 10 medals are paid out, but if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate timing (pressing position incorrect answer), the combination of the symbols to be lost is stopped and displayed on the effective line (dropped) ).

  In the case where the MB middle and small winning combination is won, and in the case where the first push order replay 3 or the second push order replay 3 is also won in duplicate, the stop operation is performed when the stop operation is performed in the push order correct (213) If the timing of the operation is appropriate (pressing position correct), the combination of the symbol of the specific small combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line (specific small combination is established), nine medals are paid out, but If the timing is not appropriate (depressed position incorrect answer), a combination of symbols that cause a loss is displayed stopped on the effective line (dropped). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with a push order incorrect answer, if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate timing (pressing position correct), the combination of symbols of MB middle and small winning combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line ( MB small and medium winning combination established, 10 medals are paid out, but if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate timing (pressing position incorrect answer), the combination of the symbols to be lost is stopped and displayed on the effective line (dropped) ).

  In the case where the MB middle and small winning combination is won, and the first push order replay 4 or the second push order replay 4 is also redundantly won, the stop is performed when the stop operation is performed in the push order correct (231) If the timing of the operation is appropriate (pressing position correct), the combination of the symbol of the specific small combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line (specific small combination is established), nine medals are paid out, but If the timing is not appropriate (depressed position incorrect answer), a combination of symbols that cause a loss is displayed stopped on the effective line (dropped). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with a push order incorrect answer, if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate timing (pressing position correct), the combination of symbols of MB middle and small winning combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line ( MB small and medium winning combination established, 10 medals are paid out, but if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate timing (pressing position incorrect answer), the combination of the symbols to be lost is stopped and displayed on the effective line (dropped) ).

  In the case where the MB middle and small winning combination is won, and the first push order replay 5 or the second push order replay 5 is also won in duplicate, the stop operation is performed when the stop operation is performed in the push order correct (312) If the timing of the operation is appropriate (pressing position correct), the combination of the symbol of the specific small combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line (specific small combination is established), nine medals are paid out, but If the timing is not appropriate (depressed position incorrect answer), a combination of symbols that cause a loss is displayed stopped on the effective line (dropped). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with a push order incorrect answer, if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate timing (pressing position correct), the combination of symbols of MB middle and small winning combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line ( MB small and medium winning combination established, 10 medals are paid out, but if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate timing (pressing position incorrect answer), the combination of the symbols to be lost is stopped and displayed on the effective line (dropped) ).

  In the case where the MB middle and small winning combination is won, and when the first push order replay 6 or the second push order replay 6 is also won in duplicate, the stop operation is performed when the stop operation is performed in the push order correct (321) If the timing of the operation is appropriate (pressing position correct), the combination of the symbol of the specific small combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line (specific small combination is established), nine medals are paid out, but If the timing is not appropriate (depressed position incorrect answer), a combination of symbols that cause a loss is displayed stopped on the effective line (dropped). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with a push order incorrect answer, if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate timing (pressing position correct), the combination of symbols of MB middle and small winning combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line ( MB small and medium winning combination established, 10 medals are paid out, but if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate timing (pressing position incorrect answer), the combination of the symbols to be lost is stopped and displayed on the effective line (dropped) ).

  When the MB small and medium winning combination is won, and the other winning combination is not repeated (in a single winning case), or push order replay (first push order replay 1 to 6 and second push order replay 1 to 1 6) When a replay combination other than (for example, normal replay) is won in duplicate, if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate timing (pressing position correct), the combination of symbols of MB medium and small combination is stopped on the effective line Displayed (MB small and medium winning combination established), 10 medals are paid out, but if the timing of the stop operation is not the appropriate timing (depressed position incorrect answer), the combination of the symbols that are lost is stopped and displayed on the effective line I'm sorry.

  As described above, when any of the MB medium and small winning combination and the push replay (the first push replays 1 to 6 and the second push replays 1 to 6 and the second push replays 1 to 6) are redundantly won, the push order is correct. And when the stop operation is performed at the timing when the pressed position is correct, the combination of the symbols of the specific small combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line, and nine medals are paid out, for example, MB gaming If it is the first game in the state, the MB gaming state can be continued in the second game. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed in the push order that is incorrect in the push order but the stop operation is performed at the timing when the pressed position is correct, the combination of the symbols of MB middle and small winning combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line By being played, ten medals are paid out, and for example, if it is the first game in the MB gaming state, the MB gaming state can not be continued in the second game. In addition, regardless of the pressing order, when the stop operation is performed at the timing when the pressed position becomes incorrect, a dropout occurs. In addition, each symbol which comprises the combination of the symbol of a specific small combination and MB small and medium combination is suitably arrange | positioned on the outer peripheral surface of reel 203L, 203C, 203R so that such stop control can be performed.

  Moreover, the combination of the symbol of the specific small combination according to the push order small combination and the combination of the symbol of the specific small combination according to the MB small and medium combination are the combination of the same symbols, and the maximum number of sliding symbols is four At one time, it is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, but when the maximum number of sliding symbols is for one symbol, it is arranged to be established only when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. It may be defined as a combination of symbols composed of the selected symbols, or may be defined as a combination of different symbols.

  In the normal gaming state (low RT gaming state (RT0), middle RT gaming state (RT1), and high RT gaming state (RT2)), the lottery value "64" is defined in the MB1 and it is won with a probability of 64/65536. Do. Further, in the MB gaming state (MB1 gaming state and MB2 gaming state), a lottery value “0” is defined, and in the MB gaming state, the player does not win.

  When MB1 is won, regardless of the pushing order and the pressed position (pushing order, pressed position regardless), the combination of symbols of MB1 is stopped and displayed on the activated line (MB1 established), but there is no payout of medals, but the next game Transition to the MB1 gaming state from. Further, as described above, when the MB1 is won in the normal section, the advantageous section start condition (the advantageous section start condition A) is satisfied, and the game is shifted from the next game to the first advantageous section.

  In the normal gaming state (low RT gaming state (RT0), middle RT gaming state (RT1), and high RT gaming state (RT2)), the lottery value "777" is defined for MB2 and it is won with the probability of 777/65536. Do. Further, in the MB gaming state (MB1 gaming state and MB2 gaming state), a lottery value “0” is defined, and in the MB gaming state, the player does not win.

  When MB2 wins, regardless of push order and pressed position (pushed order, pressed position regardless), combination of symbols of MB2 is stopped and displayed on effective line (MB2 established), but there is no payout of medals, but next game Transition to the MB2 gaming state from. The symbols constituting the combination of symbols of MB1 and the combination of symbols of MB2 are appropriately arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the reels 203L, 203C, 203R so that such stop control can be performed.

<Main control processing of the pachislot machine according to the second specification example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the main control processing of the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example will be described. The main control process shown in FIG. 51 is executed by the main CPU 231 as in the first specification example. Moreover, the description is abbreviate | omitted about the process in which the process similar to the thing in a 1st example of a specification is performed.

  First, the main CPU 231 executes power-on processing as in the first specification example (S210). Next, the main CPU 231 executes initialization processing at the end of one game (one unit game) as in the first specification example (S211). Next, the main CPU 231 executes medal acceptance / start check processing as in the first specification example (S212). Next, the main CPU 231 extracts necessary random number values and stores them in the random number value storage area allocated to the main RAM 233 (S213).

  Next, the main CPU 231 executes an internal lottery process as in the first specification example (S214-2). As described above, in the MB gaming state, the internal winning combination may be determined based on the internal lottery table for the MB gaming state (see the column of the MB gaming state in FIG. 50), or the normal game The internal winning combination is determined based on the internal lottery table for state (refer to each row of the general gaming state in FIG. 50), and before and after, all the small portions defined (for example, normal small portion, specified small portion) It is also possible to execute a process of permitting a combination of symbols of special small winning combination, special small winning combination and MB small and medium winning combination to be stopped and displayed on the activated line (that is, determined as an internal winning combination). In addition, when MB1 and MB2 are configured as carryover roles and MB1 or MB2 is carried over in the normal gaming state, MB1 or MB2 is synthesized with the internal winning combination determined as the processing result described above. , May be determined as an internal winning combination.

  Next, as in the first specification example, the main CPU 231 executes advantageous period control processing at the game start (S215-2). In this game start time advantageous section control process, if the current game section is the first advantageous section, processing for continuing the first advantageous section until the end of the MB1 gaming state is performed. If the current game section is the second advantageous section, the number of games in the second advantageous section is counted ("1" is added for one game), and the counting result establishes the advantageous section end condition. When the number of games reaches "50" when the second advantageous section is not extended, and when the second advantageous section is extended, the number of extended game times is digested Processing for ending the advantageous section). Further, when the current game section is the second advantageous section, and the above-mentioned predetermined extension condition is satisfied, processing for extending the game period of the second advantageous section (adding the number of games) is performed. .

  In addition, if the current game section is a normal section, it is determined based on the determined internal winning combination whether an advantageous section start condition (advantage section start condition A or advantageous section start condition B) is satisfied, If it is determined that the advantageous section start condition is established, processing is performed to start the first advantageous section or the second advantageous section from the next game.

  Although not shown, the main CPU 231 generates a rendering state command for transmission from the main control circuit 271 to the sub control circuit 272 in step S215-2 as well as the first specification example, and the effect is generated The state command data is stored in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 233. That is, the main CPU 231 performs processing for generating and storing a rendering state command.

  For example, when the main game section is the first advantageous section, and the main CPU 231 wins the MB medium and small-sized winning combination with the push order replay 1 (first push order replay 1 or second push order replay 1), the main CPU 231 wins. If it is a game (for example, the first game in the MB gaming state) that can receive medals first in the MB gaming state, the pressing order correct (123) and the pressed position correct (appropriate timing of the stop operation or predetermined “7” is transmitted as instruction information indicating the symbol position). On the other hand, in the case of a game where the medals can be finally paid out in the MB gaming state (for example, the second gaming in the MB gaming state), the pressing order incorrect answer (other than 123) and the pressing position correct (appropriate timing of the stop operation) Or, "10" is transmitted as instruction information indicating a predetermined symbol position). The same applies to the case where the current game section is the second advantageous section and the MB medium and small-sized winning combination and the push order replay 1 (first push order replay 1 or second push order replay 1) are won in duplicate.

  Also, for example, when the current game section is the first advantageous section, and the MB medium and small combination and the push order replay 2 (first push order replay 2 or second push order replay 2) are won in duplicate, the MB game If the game can receive medals for the first time in the state (for example, the first game in the MB gaming state), pressing order correct (132) and pressing position correct (appropriate timing of stop operation, or predetermined symbol position Send "8" as instruction information indicating. On the other hand, if it is a game (for example, the second game of the MB gaming state) which can finally receive payout of medals in the MB gaming state, the pressing order incorrect answer (other than 132) and the pressing position correct (proper timing of the stop operation) Alternatively, "11" is transmitted as instruction information indicating a predetermined symbol position). The same applies to the case where the current game section is the second advantageous section and the MB medium and small combination and the push order replay 2 (first push order replay 2 or second push order replay 2) are won in duplicate.

  Also, for example, when the current game section is the first advantageous section, and the MB medium and small combination and the push order replay 3 (first push order replay 3 or second push order replay 3) are won in duplicate, the MB game If the game can receive medals for the first time in the state (for example, the first game in the MB gaming state), the correct pressing order (213) and the correct pressing position (appropriate timing of the stop operation, or a predetermined symbol position Send "9" as instruction information indicating. On the other hand, if it is a game (for example, the second game of the MB gaming state) that can finally receive payout of medals in the MB gaming state, the pressing order incorrect answer (other than 213) and the pressing position correct (proper timing of the stop operation) Or "12" is transmitted as instruction information indicating a predetermined symbol position). The same applies to the case where the current game section is the second advantageous section, and the MB medium and small combination and the push order replay 3 (first push order replay 3 or second push order replay 3) are won in duplicate.

  Also, for example, if the current gaming section is the first advantageous section, and the MB medium and small-sized winning combination and the push order replay 4 (first push order replay 4 or second push order replay 4) are won in duplicate, the MB game If the game can receive medals for the first time in the state (for example, the first game in the MB gaming state), pressing order correct (231) and pressed position correct (appropriate timing of stop operation, or predetermined symbol position Send "10" as instruction information indicating). On the other hand, in the case of a game that can be finally paid out of medals in the MB gaming state (for example, the second gaming in the MB gaming state), the pressing order incorrect answer (other than 231) and the pressed position correct answer (appropriate timing of the stop operation) Or “7” is transmitted as instruction information indicating a predetermined symbol position). The same applies to the case where the current game section is the second advantageous section, and the MB medium and small combination and the push order replay 4 (first push order replay 4 or second push order replay 4) are won in duplicate.

  Also, for example, when the current game section is the first advantageous section, and the MB medium and small combination and the push order replay 5 (first push order replay 5 or second push order replay 5) are won in duplicate, the MB game If the game can receive medals for the first time in the state (for example, the first game in the MB gaming state), the pressing order correct (312) and the pressed position correct (appropriate timing of the stop operation, or a predetermined symbol position Send "11" as instruction information indicating. On the other hand, in the case of a game that can be finally paid out of medals in the MB gaming state (for example, the second gaming in the MB gaming state), the pressing order incorrect answer (other than 312) and the pressed position correct answer (appropriate timing of the stop operation) Or “8” is transmitted as instruction information indicating a predetermined symbol position). The same applies to the case where the current game section is the second advantageous section, and the MB medium and small combination and the push order replay 5 (first push order replay 5 or second push order replay 5) are won in duplicate.

  Also, for example, when the current game section is the first advantageous section, and the MB medium and small combination and the push order replay 6 (first push order replay 6 or second push order replay 6) are won in duplicate, the MB game If the game can receive medals for the first time in the state (for example, the first game in the MB gaming state), the pressing order correct (321) and the pressed position correct (appropriate timing of the stop operation, or a predetermined symbol position Send "12" as instruction information indicating. On the other hand, in the case of a game that can be finally paid out of medals in the MB gaming state (for example, the second gaming in the MB gaming state), the pressing order incorrect answer (other than 321) and the pressed position correct answer (appropriate timing of the stop operation) Or “9” is transmitted as instruction information indicating a predetermined symbol position). The same applies to the case where the current game section is the second advantageous section, and the MB medium and small combination and the push order replay 6 (first push order replay 6 or second push order replay 6) are won in duplicate.

  Also, for example, the current game section is the first advantageous section, and the MB middle and small winning combination overlap with any of the push replays 1 to 6 (first push replays 1 to 6 or second push replays 1 to 6). If the player does not win the game, "13" is transmitted as instruction information indicating the pressed position correct answer (appropriate timing of the stop operation or a predetermined symbol position). The current gaming section is the second advantageous section, and the MB middle and small winning combination is not won in duplicate in any of the push replays 1 to 6 (first push replays 1 to 6 or second push replays 1 to 6). The same is true for

  Also, for example, when the current game section is the second advantageous section, and the player wins the push order replay 1 or the push order small part 1, “1” is transmitted as instruction information indicating the push order correct (123), and the push is performed. When the order replay 2 or the push order small prize 2 is won, "2" is transmitted as instruction information indicating the push order correct answer (132), and when the push order replay 3 or the push order small prize 3 is won, the push order correct answer When "3" is transmitted as instruction information indicating (213) and the push order replay 4 or push order small part 4 is won, "4" is transmitted as instruction information indicating the push order correct answer (231), and the push order is transmitted. When Replay 5 or Push Order Small Combination 5 is won, “5” is transmitted as instruction information indicating the push order correct answer (312), and when Push Order Replay 6 or Push Order Small Combination 6 is won, the Push Order Corrective "6" as instruction information indicating 321) To trust.

  The mode of the instruction information is not limited to the one described above as in the first specification example, and can be set as appropriate. That is, any information may be used as long as the sub CPU 281 can recognize which stop operation procedure is the stop operation procedure advantageous to the player. Moreover, the mode of transmission of instruction information, the mode of notification, etc. are the same.

  Next, as in the first specification example, the main CPU 231 executes reel stop initialization processing (S216). Next, as in the first specification example, the main CPU 231 generates start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 271 to the sub control circuit 272, and generates the generated start command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 233. Store (S217). Next, the main CPU 231 executes lock execution processing at game start (S218), as in the first specification example. Next, the main CPU 231 executes weight processing as in the first specification example (S219). Next, the main CPU 231 executes a reel rotation start process as in the first specification example (S220). Next, the main CPU 231 executes the reel stop control process as in the first specification example (S221). Next, the main CPU 231 executes a winning search process as in the first specification example (S222). Next, as in the first specification example, medal payout processing is executed (S223).

  Next, the main CPU 231 executes an RT gaming state update process as in the first specification example (S224-2). In this RT gaming state update process, a process of updating the RT gaming state is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined transition trigger of the RT gaming state.

  In the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example, when the RT gaming state is the low RT gaming state (RT0), the transition to the medium RT gaming state (RT1) is made when the ascending replay 1 is established. Further, when the RT gaming state is the middle RT gaming state (RT1), when the increase replay 2 is established, the state is shifted to the high RT gaming state (RT2). In addition, when the RT gaming state is the middle RT gaming state (RT1) and the high RT gaming state (RT2), when the downward replay or the downward symbol is established, the state is shifted to the low RT gaming state (RT0).

  Next, the main CPU 231 executes a bonus end check process as in the first specification example (S225-2). In this bonus end check process, the MB gaming state is ended when the ending condition defined in the MB gaming state (in this example, that there is a payout exceeding “9” sheets) is satisfied. In this example, although the same end condition is defined in the MB1 gaming state and the MB2 gaming state, the defined end condition is not limited to this. For example, the termination condition of the MB1 gaming state may be defined so that a predetermined number of (for example, three) or more games can be performed regardless of which of the winning combinations is established.

  Although not shown, when ending the MB gaming state in step S225-2, the main CPU 231 generates bonus end command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 271 to the sub control circuit 272, and the generated bonus ends. Command data is stored in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 233. That is, the main CPU 231 generates and stores a bonus end command. The bonus end command is, for example, a command for enabling the sub CPU 281 to recognize information such as the end of the MB gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 231 executes the bonus operation check process as in the first specification example (S226-2). In this bonus operation check process, the MB gaming state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state) is started when the MB gaming state start condition (MB1 establishment or MB2 establishment) is satisfied in the normal gaming state. In addition, when the operation conditions for replay (normal replay, ascending replay 1, ascending replay 2 and descending replay established) are satisfied, an automatic insertion request is made to activate replay in the next game.

  Although illustration is omitted, when the MB gaming state is started in step S226-2, the main CPU 231 generates bonus start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 271 to the sub control circuit 272, and the generated bonus start Command data is stored in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 233. That is, the main CPU 231 generates and stores a bonus start command. The bonus start command is, for example, a command for enabling the sub CPU 281 to recognize information such as the type (2 types in the second specification example) of the started bonus and the start of the MB gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 231 executes advantageous period control processing at the end of the game as in the first specification example (S227-2). In this game end time advantageous area control process, for example, when starting the first advantageous area or the second advantageous area from the next game, control is performed to turn on the above-mentioned section display area (area indicator), and this time the game When the first advantageous section or the second advantageous section is ended, control is performed to turn off the section display area (section indicator) described above. Note that, as described above, the timing at which the section display area (section indicator) is turned on and off is not limited to the timing, and can be set as appropriate.

  Next, as in the first specification example, the main CPU 231 executes lock execution processing at the game end (S228). After executing the processing of step S228, the main CPU 231 returns to the processing of step S211.

[Example of Flowchart of Control Processing of Display Device for Gaming (Game Device) According to the First to Ninth Embodiments when a Gaming Machine According to the First Specification Example is Connected]
Next, an example of control processing of the game display device (game device) according to the above-described first to ninth embodiments when the game machine according to the first specification example described above is connected will be described with reference to FIG. This will be described using FIG. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a first example of main control processing of the game display device 1 when the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the first specification example described above is connected, and FIG. FIG. 17 is a view showing a second example of the main control processing of the game display device 1 when the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to one specification example is connected. The main processing of the game display device 1 is executed by control means (for example, the display CPU 101 described above or the control circuit F10250 described above) that performs control on display in the game display device 1. Below, it demonstrates as a process which display CPU101 performs.

<First Example of Main Control Processing of Display Device 1 for Games>
First, with reference to FIG. 52, a first example of the main control process of the game display device 1 will be described. In this first example, after the Pachislot machine 2b decides to start the advantageous section, it continuously outputs the advantageous section signal until it decides to end the advantageous section (ie, the advantageous section Will be described with reference to the case where it can be recognized on the game display device 1 side that the game start is in progress, the advantageous section is in progress, and the advantageous section is ended.

  First, when the power is turned on to the game display device 1, the display CPU 101 executes a power-on process (S110). In the power-on process, an initialization process as an open-room process of the game arcade is executed. For example, the display CPU 101 initializes today's game history, stores the already stored game history as the game history of the previous day, and previously stores the game history stored as the game history before the previous day (one day before). The game history is updated, such as being carried back and stored as a game history before the day (two days ago). It should be noted that such updating of the game history may be performed based on the update request operation from the store clerk at the game arcade, or may be automatically performed when the power is turned on. .

  Next, the display CPU 101 checks a signal input from the pachislot machine 2b (more specifically, the external relay terminal board 217) and its change (S111). That is, the display CPU 101 determines whether or not the state of the pachislot machine 2b has changed.

  Next, the display CPU 101 determines whether the game section in the pachislot gaming machine 2b is an advantageous section (S112). That is, the display CPU 101 determines whether or not the advantageous section signal is input from the pachislot machine 2b. If the display CPU 101 determines in S112 that the game section in the pachislot machine 2b is an advantageous section (that is, the advantageous section signal is input), the process proceeds to S113. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming section in the pachislot gaming machine 2b is not the advantageous section (that is, the advantageous section signal is not input), the processing is shifted to S121.

  In S113, the display CPU 101 executes various counter update processing during the advantageous section (S113). Here, in the storage means (for example, the display RAM 103 described above and the RAMF 10252 described above) in the game display device 1, various counters such as the following are provided in order to appropriately display information related to the game to the player. The values of these counters are updated in response to various signals from the pachislot machine 2b. In the following, it will be described as a counter provided in the display RAM 103.

(Game number counter)
The game number counter is a counter that counts the number of games (the total number of games mentioned above, the current number of games described later) on today (the business day of the game arcade). For example, when a medal insertion signal for three pulses (ie, indicating that three medals have been inserted) is input, the display CPU 101 performs processing for adding “1” to the game number counter. Thereby, regardless of whether the game section is the advantageous section or the normal section, the number of times of playing when the gaming state is the normal gaming state is counted. When the medal insertion signal is input, the display CPU 101 receives the number of games regardless of the number of pulses in the medal insertion signal (that is, the number of inserted medals) except when the bonus in-progress signal is input. A process of adding "1" to the counter may be performed. That is, if it is a method that can count the number of games when the gaming state in the pachislot gaming machine 2b is a gaming state other than the special gaming state (BB gaming state), other methods can be used. However, even if you use the method of counting the number of games on the current day (the business day of the game arcade), including the number of games when the gaming state in the pachislot gaming machine 2b is the special gaming state (BB gaming state), Good.

(IN number · OUT number counter)
The IN number / OUT number counter is a counter for counting the number of inserted medals and the number of paid out medals today (the business day of the game arcade). For example, when the medal insertion signal is input, the display CPU 101 performs a process of adding the IN number counter according to the number of pulses (that is, the number of inserted medals) in the medal insertion signal. Further, for example, when the medal payout signal is input, the display CPU 101 performs a process of adding the OUT number counter according to the number of pulses (that is, the number of medals paid out) in the medal payout signal. Thus, the number of medals inserted into the pachislot machine 2b and the number of medals paid out from the pachislot machine 2b are counted today (the business day of the game arcade). Note that, for example, the IN number / OUT number counter may be configured as one counter. In this case, the counter is subtracted (or added) in accordance with the number of pulses in the medal insertion signal (ie, the number of medals inserted), and added (or subtracted) in accordance with the number of pulses in the medal payout signal (ie, the number of medals dispensed). ) Should be performed. Further, the IN number / OUT number counter may be used together with the advantageous section acquisition number counter described later, and the value of the advantageous section acquisition number counter described later is calculated from the count value of the IN number / OUT number counter. You may do it.

(Bonus number counter)
The bonus number counter is a counter that counts the number of bonus times (the number of BBs and the number of RBs, and the number of BBs described later) on today (the business day of the game arcade). When the input of the bonus in-progress signal is newly started, the bonus number counter is incremented by one. In the Pachi-Slot gaming machine 2b, when the bonus signal is output during one game or for a predetermined period, the bonus counter is set based on the bonus signal being input. A process of adding “1” may be performed.

(Counter of advantageous section times)
The advantageous section number counter is a counter that counts the number of advantageous sections (the number of advantageous sections described later) on today (the business day of the game arcade). When the input of the advantageous section signal is newly started, the advantageous section number counter is incremented by one. In the case where the advantageous section signal is output during one game or in a predetermined period (is output only once) in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, the advantageous section signal is input. Based on the process, the process of adding “1” to the advantageous section number counter may be performed.

(Favorite zone counter)
The advantageous section counter is a counter that counts the number of games played in the advantageous section (total number of advantageous section games to be described later) when the game section of the pachislot gaming machine 2b is an advantageous section. For example, in the case where the advantageous section signal is input and the medal insertion signal is input, the display CPU 101 selects the advantageous section counter regardless of the number of pulses in the medal insertion signal (that is, the number of medals inserted). To add "1". Here, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the first specification example, the number of inserted cards may be different between the special gaming state (BB gaming state) and the normal gaming state, but according to the advantageous section counter, it is in the advantageous section If so, regardless of whether the gaming state is the special gaming state (BB gaming state) or the normal gaming state, it can be counted as the number of times of playing during the advantageous section. And, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the first specification example, the advantageous section continues "1500" times regardless of whether the gaming state is the special gaming state (BB gaming state) or the normal gaming state. Since it displays, according to the value of the said advantageous section counter, it can interlock with the pachislo game machine 2b connected, and can perform the display in an advantageous section.

(Counter of advantageous section acquisition number)
The advantageous section acquisition number counter is a counter for counting the number of medals acquired in the advantageous section (total number of acquired advantageous section numbers to be described later) when the game section of the pachislot machine 2b is an advantageous section. For example, when the advantageous section signal is input and the medal insertion signal is input, the display CPU 101 obtains the advantageous section by the number of pulses in the medal insertion signal (ie, the number of medals inserted). When the medal payout signal is input by subtracting the number counter, the processing for adding the advantageous section acquisition number counter is performed for the number of pulses in the medal payout signal (that is, the number of medals paid out). As a result, when the game section is an advantageous section, the number of acquired game media (medal) (i.e., the difference number, the net increase number) is counted. The advantageous section acquisition number counter may be one to which the number of medals paid out is simply added without subtracting the number of inserted medals.

  In addition, it is necessary that the value of the advantageous section acquisition number counter (the value of the below-mentioned advantageous section total acquisition number displayed for the player) and the actual number of acquisitions (that is, the difference sheet number, the net increase number) always be completely matched. For example, in order to prevent the player from having a sense of incongruity, the display CPU 101 may acquire the advantageous section acquisition number counter so that the value of the advantageous section total acquisition number described later can be more useful information for the player. By performing a predetermined correction process on the value of {circle around (1)}, the value of the total acquisition number of advantageous sections described later may be displayed.

  For example, in the Pachislo game machine 2b according to the first specification example, in the case where the advantageous section is started after passing the standby section, the advantageous section substantially corresponds to the advantageous section even if the advantageous section signal is input. It may not have been started. In this case, the medal acquisition status in the standby section (in the standby section, the notification of the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player and the BB gaming state are often negative values in the standby section). The value may not be reflected on the value of the total number of advantageous sections acquired (that is, not counted as the value of the advantageous section acquisition number counter) described later.

  Specifically, even if the display CPU 101 determines in S112 that the gaming section in the pachislot machine 2b is an advantageous section, it is within a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) after the advantageous section is started. If it is, in S113, the update processing of the advantageous section acquisition number counter is suspended (provisionally counted, but not officially updated as the value of the advantageous section acquisition number counter), and a predetermined number of games (for example, If the bonus in-game signal is input within 5 games), it is determined that the period is the standby zone, and the number of medals acquired for the advantageous zone counter is obtained for the number of medals acquired (temporarily counted) suspended in that period. The advantageous interval acquisition number counter is updated so as not to be counted as a value. On the other hand, if the bonus in-progress signal is not input within a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games), it is determined that the period is not the standby section, and the number of medals held (temporarily counted) is suspended for that period The retroactive interval acquisition number counter is updated to be counted back as the value of the advantageous interval acquisition number counter.

  Further, in this case, if the display CPU 101 is within a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) since the start of the advantageous section, the temporary CPU counts the number of medals in that period by the temporary counting counter different from the advantageous section acquisition number counter. The number of winnings is counted, and when it is determined that the bonus in-on signal is input within a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) and the period is the standby section, the value of the temporary counting counter (that is, medal acquisition in the standby section If the number is a positive value (that is, one whose counting result indicates an increase in medals), the number of advantageous section acquisitions is counted so that the value is (regressively) counted as the value of the advantageous section acquisition number counter If the counter is updated and the value is negative (ie, the result of the count indicates a decrease in medals), that value is not counted as the value of the advantageous section acquisition number counter Sea urchin to update the advantageous period tally counter. In this case, an initial value (0) may be displayed as a total acquisition number of advantageous sections described later.

  In this case, if it is determined that the bonus in-game signal is not input within a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) and the period is not the standby section, the value of the temporary counting counter (that is, the medals in the standby section). Update the advantage interval acquisition number counter so that its value is counted (as retroactively) as the value of the advantage interval acquisition number counter, regardless of whether it is a positive value or a negative value. The same process may be performed as in the case where it is determined that the above is the standby section described above.

  In addition, as described above, as a method of counting the number of medals acquired within a predetermined game number (for example, 5 games) since the start of the advantageous section, the processing for updating the advantageous section acquired number counter is suspended (advantageously Although the method of temporarily counting as the section acquisition number counter and the method of using the temporary counting counter have been described as an example, the method is not limited to these. For example, counting may be performed based on the counting result of the above-described IN number / OUT number counter.

  Further, as described above, as a method of determining whether or not the advantageous section in the pachislot gaming machine 2b is started after the standby section, a bonus in-on signal is input within a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games). Although the method of determining whether or not it has been described as an example, the method is not limited to this. For example, if the number of medals acquired for a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) is a negative value, it is determined that the period is a standby section, and if it is a positive value, it is determined that the period is not a standby section You may do it. Also, for example, if a signal during RT indicating a specific RT gaming state (for example, high RT gaming state (RT1)) is not input within a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games), that period is a standby interval If the in-RT signal indicating that it is a specific RT gaming state (for example, high RT gaming state (RT1)) is input, it may be determined that the period is not a standby section.

  As described above, in step S113, the display CPU 101 appropriately updates the various counters described above as described above. The various counters described above are merely examples, and the gaming display device 1 can further be provided with other counters necessary for displaying information. Moreover, it is also possible to provide only a part of the various counters mentioned above.

  Next, the display CPU 101 determines whether the advantageous segment counter is "1500" (S114). That is, the display CPU 101 determines whether or not the game in the advantageous section has been digested 1,500 times in the pachislot gaming machine 2b. If the display CPU 101 determines in S114 that the advantageous segment counter is “1500” (that is, the game in the advantageous segment has been digested 1500 times), the process proceeds to S115. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous segment counter is not "1500" (ie, the game in the advantageous segment has not been digested 1500 times), the processing is shifted to S116.

  In S115, the display CPU 101 executes advantageous period end display processing (S115). In the advantageous area end display process, the display CPU 101 performs, for example, a process for notifying the player that the advantageous area is ended. As a result, in the gaming display device 1, information such as an image indicating that the advantageous section is ended is displayed, and notification of the end of the advantageous section is executed. Further, after updating the game history of the present day based on the values of the advantageous segment counter and the advantageous segment acquisition number counter, for example, the display CPU 101 performs processing of initializing (clearing to zero) the values of these counters. After executing the processing of S115, the display CPU 101 returns to the processing of S111.

  In S116, the display CPU 101 determines whether the advantageous segment counter is “1495” or more (S116). That is, the display CPU 101 determines whether or not the game in the advantageous section has been digested 1495 times or more in the pachislot gaming machine 2b. If the display CPU 101 determines in S116 that the advantageous segment counter is “1495” or more (that is, the game in the advantageous segment has been digested 1495 times or more), the process proceeds to S117. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous segment counter is not “1495” or more (ie, the game in the advantageous segment has not been digested more than 1495 times), the processing is shifted to S118.

  In S117, the display CPU 101 executes advantageous section countdown display processing (S117). In the advantageous section countdown display process, the display CPU 101 performs, for example, a process for notifying the player that the advantageous section is about to end. Specifically, for example, when the advantageous section counter is “1495”, the display CPU 101 performs processing for informing the player that the advantageous section is to be ended by the remaining five games. Then, each time the advantageous segment counter is incremented by 1, the number of remaining notified games is sequentially decreased. As a result, in the gaming display device 1, information such as an image indicating the number of times of games remaining in the advantageous section is displayed, and the notification of the end of the advantageous section is executed. After executing the processing of S117, the display CPU 101 shifts the processing to S118.

  In S118, the display CPU 101 determines whether the gaming state in the pachislot gaming machine 2b is a bonus (BB gaming state) (S118). That is, the display CPU 101 determines whether or not the bonus in-progress signal is input from the pachislot machine 2b. If the display CPU 101 determines in S118 that the gaming state in the pachislot gaming machine 2b is bonusing (BB gaming state) (that is, the bonus in-progress signal is input), the process proceeds to S119. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state in the pachislot gaming machine 2b is not in the bonus (BB gaming state) (that is, the bonus in-progress signal is not input), the processing is shifted to S120.

  In S119, the display CPU 101 executes the third state display process (S119). In the third state display process, for example, the display CPU 101 performs a process for notifying the player that the special game state (BB gaming state) is in progress during the advantageous section. Thereby, in the gaming display device 1, information such as an image indicating that the current state is the advantageous section and the special gaming state (third state) is displayed. In addition, as the display of the third state, for example, the effect display with the highest visual effect may be performed along with characters such as “during advantageous section continuing! Bonus GET !!”. Moreover, when the display of the 3rd state is performed, when the advantageous section is performed "1500" times and the advantageous section ends, the third display is switched to the second display ( In this case, the third display may be continued until the end of the special gaming state (BB gaming state). After executing the process of S119, the display CPU 101 returns to the process of S111.

  In S120, the display CPU 101 executes a first state display process (S120). In the first state display process, the display CPU 101 performs, for example, a process for notifying the player that it is in an advantageous section. As a result, in the gaming display device 1, information such as an image indicating that the current state is an advantageous section (first state) is displayed. In addition, as the display of the first state, for example, effect display may be performed with a visual effect relatively lower than that of the third state together with characters such as “during advantageous section continuing!”. After executing the processing of S120, the display CPU 101 returns to the processing of S111.

  In S121, the display CPU 101 executes various counter update processing during the normal section (S121). In the various counter updating process during the normal section, the display CPU 101 appropriately updates counters such as the above-described game number counter, IN / OUT number counter, and bonus number counter, as in the process of S113.

  Next, the display CPU 101 determines whether the gaming state in the pachislot gaming machine 2b is a bonus (BB gaming state) (S122). That is, the display CPU 101 determines whether or not the bonus in-progress signal is input from the pachislot machine 2b. If the display CPU 101 determines in S122 that the gaming state of the pachislot gaming machine 2b is bonusing (BB gaming state) (that is, the bonus in-progress signal is input), the process proceeds to S123. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state in the pachislot gaming machine 2b is not in the bonus state (BB gaming state) (ie, the bonus in-progress signal is not input), the process proceeds to S124.

  In S123, the display CPU 101 executes a second state display process (S123). In the second state display process, the display CPU 101 performs, for example, a process for notifying the player that a special gaming state (BB gaming state) is in progress. Thereby, in the gaming display device 1, information such as an image indicating that the current state is the special gaming state (second state) is displayed. In addition, as the display of the second state, for example, effects such as “bonus GET !!” and the like may be displayed with effect having a visual effect relatively lower than that of the third state. After executing the processing of S123, the display CPU 101 returns to the processing of S111.

  In S124, the display CPU 101 executes a normal state display process (S124). In the normal state display process, the display CPU 101 performs, for example, a process for notifying the player that the game is not in the advantageous section or in the special gaming state (BB gaming state). However, the fact that the game is in the normal game mode of the normal section is not positively notified, and in the game display device 1, information such as an image showing a basic screen (initial screen) is displayed. After executing the processing of S124, the display CPU 101 returns to the processing of S111.

  As described above, according to the gaming display device 1 of this example, when the special section is in the advantageous section and not in the special game mode, the first state is displayed, and the special game mode is not in the advantageous section. The display of the second state is performed, and the display of the third state is performed when in the advantageous section and in the special game state. Therefore, even in the case where a plurality of advantageous gaming states are managed as a series of advantageous sections in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, information desired by the player can be notified as appropriately as possible.

  Further, according to the gaming display device 1 of the present embodiment, when in the advantageous section, the number of games in the advantageous section is counted regardless of whether or not the special gaming state is in effect. The number of acquired game media is also counted, and a display corresponding to the counted result is performed. Therefore, even in the case where a plurality of advantageous gaming states are managed as a series of advantageous sections in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, it is possible to appropriately inform of the game situation in the advantageous sections.

  Further, according to the gaming display device 1 of the present example, when the specific display start condition associated with the ending condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the information indicating the number of games played in the advantageous section or the advantageous section Information indicating termination is to be notified. Therefore, even in the case where a plurality of advantageous gaming states are managed as a series of advantageous sections in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, in particular, it is possible to appropriately notify information on the end in the advantageous sections.

  Further, according to the gaming display device 1 of the present embodiment, when in the advantageous section, the number of games in the advantageous section is counted regardless of whether or not the special gaming mode is in effect, and the normal gaming mode is being executed. In this case, the number of games played in the normal game state is counted regardless of whether or not the advantageous section is in progress. Then, when in the advantageous section, regardless of the number of inserted game media in the unit game, the number of games in the advantageous section is counted, and when in the normal gaming state, the game media is inserted in the unit game When the number is a predetermined number (for example, three), the number of games in the normal gaming state is counted. Therefore, while being able to grasp the number of games during the advantageous section in the pachislot gaming machine 2b appropriately, it is also possible to appropriately grasp the number of gaming in the normal gaming state in the pachislot gaming machine 2b. can do.

  Further, according to the gaming display device 1 of the present embodiment, when the advantageous section in the pachislot gaming machine 2b starts after passing through the predetermined standby section, the number of acquired game media in the predetermined standby section is advantageous. It does not count as the number of game media acquired in the section. Therefore, even in the case where a standby period is provided in the advantageous section in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, it is possible to appropriately notify information on the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section.

  Further, in this case, if the number of acquired game media is increased in the predetermined standby section, the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section is retroactively counted, and including the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section If the acquired number of gaming media is decreased, the predetermined initial value may be displayed as the acquired number of gaming media in the advantageous section when the advantageous section is actually started. This makes it possible not only to more appropriately display the information on the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section, but also to prevent the player from feeling discomfort by the display.

<Second Example of Main Control Processing of Display Device 1 for Games>
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, a second example of the main control process of the game display device 1 will be described. In this second example, when the pachislot gaming machine 2b decides to start the advantageous section, the advantageous section signal is displayed only during a predetermined period (for example, during one game or a predetermined output period). Output (ie, it can be recognized on the game display device 1 that the advantageous section is started, but it is recognized on the game display 1 that the advantageous section is in progress and the advantageous section is ended It will be described by taking the case where it is impossible) as an example. In addition, the description is abbreviate | omitted about the process of the same content as a 1st example.

  First, the display CPU 101 executes the power-on process (S130), as in S110 of the first example described above. Next, the display CPU 101 checks the input signal and its change as in the case of S111 of the first example described above (S131).

  Next, the display CPU 101 determines whether the in-advantage zone flag is on (S132). During the advantageous section flag is identification information that is turned on when the advantageous section signal is input from the pachislot machine 2b in S144 and S145 described later. That is, display CPU 101 determines whether the game section in pachislot gaming machine 2b is an advantageous section (more specifically, in display CPU 101, it is determined whether the gaming section in pachislot gaming machine 2b is an advantageous section To determine. If the display CPU 101 determines in S132 that the flag of the advantageous section is on, the process proceeds to S133. On the other hand, when it is determined that the flag during the advantageous section is not on, the process proceeds to S143.

  In S133, the display CPU 101 executes various counter update processing during the advantageous section, as in S113 of the first example described above (S133). Next, the display CPU 101 determines whether the advantageous section end possible flag is on (S134). The advantageous section end possible flag is turned on when the medal payout signal (for 9 pulses) is input from the pachislot machine 2b to indicate that the number of medals paid out is “9” in S141 and S142 described later. Identification information. The advantageous section end possible flag will be described later. If the display CPU 101 determines that the advantageous section end possible flag is on in S134, the process proceeds to S135. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous section end possible flag is not on, the process proceeds to S141.

  In S135, the display CPU 101 executes advantageous period end determination processing (S135). In this example, as described above, since the display CPU 101 can not recognize the end of the advantageous section by the signal input from the pachislot machine 2b, the advantageous section in the pachislot game machine 2b is independently ended. It is decided to determine whether there is (can be considered as finished) or not. Specifically, in the case where the flag during the advantageous section is on, the display CPU 101 sets the payout number of medals for a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) to a predetermined threshold (for example, the number of payouts for the inserted number). It is determined whether the ratio (outgoing ball rate) falls below “1” (100%), and if it is determined that it falls below the predetermined threshold, it is determined that the advantageous section is over, and the predetermined threshold If it is determined that it does not fall below, it is determined that the advantageous section has not ended.

  The method of determining whether or not the advantageous section of the pachislot machine 2b is ended (can be regarded as ended) by the display CPU 101 is not limited to this. For example, the medal insertion signal is input but the medal payout signal is not input (that is, it is possible to identify that the pachislot machine 2b has become lost) continuously or for a predetermined number of times (for example, within a predetermined period) If it is three or more times, it is determined that the advantageous section is ended, and if it is less than the predetermined number of times, it may be determined that the advantageous section is not ended.

  Also, for example, a medal insertion signal is input, and a medal payout signal (for three pulses) indicating that the number of medals to be paid out is "3" is input (that is, replay can be established in the pachislot machine 2b) If the number of times it can be identified as high) is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) continuously or within a predetermined period, it is determined that the advantageous section has ended, and the predetermined number of times or more If it is, it may be determined that the advantageous section has not ended.

  Also, for example, when the number of times the medal payout signal is input within a predetermined period is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, three times), it is determined that the advantageous section has ended, and the predetermined number of times or more. In this case, it may be determined that the advantageous section has not ended.

  Also, for example, when the value of the above-mentioned advantageous section acquisition number counter decreases by a predetermined number (for example, 15 sheets) or more within a predetermined period, it is determined that the advantageous section has ended, and the predetermined number or more is decreased. If not, it may be determined that the advantageous section has not ended.

  Next, the display CPU 101 determines whether or not it is determined in the advantageous section end determination process of S135 that the advantageous section is ended (S136). If the display CPU 101 determines in S136 that the advantageous section is determined to be ended, the process proceeds to S137. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is determined that the advantageous section has not ended, the process proceeds to S139.

  In S137, the display CPU 101 executes the advantageous section end display processing as in S115 of the first example described above (S137). Next, the display CPU 101 turns off the flag during the advantageous section which has been turned on, and turns off the advantageous section end possible flag which has been turned on (S138). After executing the process of S138, the display CPU 101 returns to the process of S131.

  In S139, the display CPU 101 determines whether the advantageous segment counter exceeds “1500” and is a predetermined value (for example, “1550”) (S139). In the pachislot machine 2b according to the first specification example, one advantageous section is to be ended by "1500" times of games. Therefore, basically, it should be determined that the advantageous section has ended by the time the advantageous section counter reaches the above-described predetermined value (see S135). However, if it is not determined that the advantageous section has ended even if the advantageous section counter reaches the above-described predetermined value, the connection between the gaming display apparatus 1 side or the gaming display apparatus 1 and the pachislot gaming machine 2b is performed. There is a possibility that something is wrong with the line. In addition, there is a possibility that some trouble has occurred or cheating is being performed on the pachislot machine 2b side. Therefore, the display CPU 101 performs special processing when the advantageous section counter exceeds “1500” and reaches a predetermined threshold (the above-described predetermined value).

  If the display CPU 101 determines in step S139 that the advantageous section counter exceeds “1500” and has the above-described predetermined value, the process proceeds to step S140. On the other hand, when it is not determined that the advantageous section counter exceeds “1500” and is not the predetermined value described above, the process returns to the process of S131. In addition, the predetermined value mentioned above can be suitably set according to the specification of the game machine connected. In addition, the above-described predetermined value may be set on the game arcade side. In this way, it is possible to determine on the basis of the game arcade's policy whether the occurrence of a malfunction or the possibility that fraud has been made can be determined based on the criteria.

  In S140, the display CPU 101 executes an error display process as an example of the special process described above (S140). In this error display process, for example, the display CPU 101 performs a process to notify that there is a possibility that some trouble has occurred or the fraudulent action has been taken with respect to the end of the advantageous section. Thereby, in the game display device 1, special information such as an image indicating that an abnormality (error) has occurred is displayed. As the error display, for example, it is possible to perform effect display that enables recognition of an error state together with characters such as "The end of the advantageous section can not be confirmed. Please call a staff member." However, positive error display may not be performed, and the basic screen (initial screen) may be forcibly returned. In this case, the predetermined information is transmitted from the game display device 1 to the server device 4 or the like so that at least the possibility of the occurrence of the malfunction or the wrongdoing being performed on the game arcade side can be recognized. Just do it. After executing the process of S140, the display CPU 101 returns to the process of S131.

  In S141, the display CPU 101 determines whether or not a medal payout signal indicating that a specific number (9 in this example) of medals has been dispensed is input (S141). If the display CPU 101 determines in S141 that the medal payout signal indicating that the above-described specific number of medals has been dispensed is input, the process proceeds to S142. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is determined that the medal payout signal indicating that the above-described specific number of medals has been dispensed is not input, the processing returns to S131.

  In S142, the display CPU 101 turns on the advantageous section end possible flag (S142). Here, when nine medals are paid out in the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the first specification example, there is a high possibility that notification of the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player is performed (see FIG. 47), the display CPU 101 notifies that the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player is performed, when the display CPU 101 recognizes that nine medals have been paid out in the pachislot machine 2b at least once in the advantageous section. By setting the advantageous section end possible flag to ON, it is controlled to be able to end the display of the specific state corresponding to the advantageous section on the gaming display device 1 side. In addition, the advantageous section end possible flag, when the number of times it is determined that the medal payout signal indicating that the above-described specific number of medals has been dispensed is input in S141 is a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) It may be turned on. After executing the processing of S142, the display CPU 101 returns to the processing of S131.

  In S143, the display CPU 101 executes various counter update processing during the normal section, as in S121 of the first example described above (S143). Next, the display CPU 101 determines whether an advantageous section signal is input (S 144). If the display CPU 101 determines that the advantageous section signal has been input, it turns on the flag during the advantageous section (S145). Also, in this process, display of a specific state corresponding to the advantageous section is started. In addition, as the display of the specific state, for example, effects such as “during an advantageous section continuing!” May be displayed with a relatively high visual effect. After executing the processing of S145, the display CPU 101 returns to the processing of S131. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous section signal is not input, the process returns to the process of S131.

  As described above, according to the gaming display device 1 of the present embodiment, when there is a payout of a specified number of gaming media during the advantageous section, the display of the specific state corresponding to the advantageous section can be ended. When it is determined that the advantageous section is ended, if the display of the specific state can be ended, the display of the specific state is ended. Therefore, even if it is not possible to clearly recognize the end of the advantageous section in the pachislot machine 2b on the game display device 1 side, it is possible to prevent the display contents from being wrinkled as much as possible. .

  In addition, according to the gaming display device 1 of the present example, the special information is displayed when it is determined that the number of times of gaming in the advantageous section reaches a specific number of games without being determined that the advantageous section is ended. It is supposed to Therefore, even if the end of the advantageous section in the pachislot machine 2b can not be clearly recognized on the side of the display device 1 for gaming, it is possible to prevent the display contents from being wrinkled as much as possible. Furthermore, the game arcade side can accurately recognize the possibility of the occurrence of a malfunction or an illegal act.

[An example of a timing chart of each control process in a case where a game display device (game device) according to the first to ninth embodiments and a game machine according to the first specification example are connected]
Next, an example of a timing chart of each control process when the gaming display device (gaming device) according to the first to ninth embodiments described above and the gaming machine according to the first specification example described above are connected Will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55.

<First Example of Timing Chart of Control Process of Display Device for Gaming 1 and Pachi-Slot Game Machine 2b According to First Specification Example>
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a first example of a timing chart of control processing when the above-described gaming display device 1 and the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the above-described first specification example are connected, and more specifically FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a timing chart corresponding to a part of the first example of the main control process of the game display device 1 described with reference to FIG. 52.

  In this example, for example, on the previous day (one day before), the number of games played at the game store closing time is "500" (in the above-described power-on process, the game history is updated and stored for the previous day) Today, the number of BBs is "0" (bonus number counter = 0), the number of advantageous sections is "0" (number of advantageous sections counter = 0), the current number of games is "0" (number of game counters = 0) The case where the game is started from the state (i.e., the state immediately after the game arcade is opened) being initialized to. The display contents of today's game history will be described later with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58.

  First, at the time of "t1" (for example, the current number of games is "150"), in the pachislot machine 2b, the above-mentioned advantageous section start condition (for example, advantageous section start condition A) is satisfied and the game section is from the normal section Based on the transition to the advantageous section, the output of the advantageous section signal is started. When the input of the advantageous section signal is started, the game display device 1 starts displaying the first state indicating that the advantageous section is being performed. Further, the game display device 1 adds “1” to the advantageous section number counter. Further, the gaming display device 1 starts counting the number of games during the advantageous section by the advantageous section counter and counting the number of medals acquired in the advantageous section by the advantageous section acquisition number counter.

  Next, at the time of "t2" (for example, the current number of games is "155" and the total number of advantageous areas games is "5"), the above-mentioned ascending replay is established and the RT gaming state is low RT in the pachislot machine 2b. Based on the transition from the gaming state (RT0) to the high RT gaming state (RT1), the output of the RT in-progress signal is started. The gaming display device 1 does not make any special control change even when the input of the RT signal is started. However, from this time point on, it is possible to start counting the number of medals acquired in the advantageous section by the advantageous section acquired number counter. In addition, part of the display of the first state may be changed from this time point. For example, at the time of “t1” described above, it is displayed that the advantageous section, which is a game section to which the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is informed, is started (during the advantageous section). At the time of t 2 ", it may be displayed that the gaming state in the advantageous section has become a specific RT gaming state.

  Next, at the time of "t3" (for example, the current number of games is "300" and the total number of advantageous areas games is "150"), the above BB is established in the pachislot machine 2b and the gaming state is the normal gaming state ((0) Based on the transition to the BB gaming state from the bonus internal winning (RT2)), the output of the bonus in-progress signal is started. When the input of the in-bonus signal is started, the game display device 1 ends the display of the first state, and starts the display of the third state indicating that it is in the advantageous section and in the middle of the bonus. Further, the gaming display device 1 increments the bonus number counter by one. The game display device 1 continues counting the number of games played in the advantageous section by the advantageous section counter and counting the number of medals acquired in the advantageous section by the advantageous section acquired number counter. Counting is suspended. In the present example, the BB gaming state basically ends in the “25” game and “200” medals are obtained (2 medals inserted → 10 medals) Disbursement: Because it will be disbursed more than 240 medals in 25 games.

  Next, at the time of "t4" (for example, the current number of games is "300" and the total number of advantageous areas games is "175"), the above-described BB ends and the gaming state is from the BB gaming state in the pachislot machine 2b. Based on the transition to the normal gaming state (low RT gaming state (RT0)), the output of the in-bonus signal is ended. When the input of the in-bonus signal is ended, the gaming display device 1 ends the display of the third state and starts the display of the first state. In addition, the game display device 1 resumes the counting of the number of games by the game number counter. It should be noted that, at this time, the game display device 1 counts the number of medals acquired in the special gaming state (BB gaming state) separately from the total acquisition number (advantage area acquisition number counter) during the advantageous section. It is desirable to do.

  Next, at the time of "t5" (for example, the current number of games is "1625" and the total number of advantageous areas games is "1500"), the above-mentioned advantageous area end condition is satisfied in the pachislot machine 2b and the game area is advantageous The output of the advantageous interval signal is ended based on the transition from the interval to the normal interval. When the input of the advantageous section signal is ended, the display device 1 for gaming is ended the display of the first state, and if it is in bonus (if the signal during bonus is outputted) the display of the second state is started If it is not in the bonus mode (if the bonus signal is not output), the display of the normal condition is started. Further, the display device for game 1 finishes counting the number of games during the advantageous section by the advantageous section counter and counting the number of medals acquired during the advantageous section by the advantageous section acquisition number counter, and counts the counting results by these counters. The game history is stored and the counting results of these counters are initialized (0 cleared).

  Note that the value of the advantageous section counter and the value of the advantageous section cumulative game number actually displayed on the player do not necessarily have to completely match, for example, the value of the actual advantageous section counter is “1500” or “1498 However, as shown in FIG. 57 and FIG. 58 described later, the number of advantageous zone cumulative games includes the number of games in the BB gaming state (eg, “25,” the same as the value of the current number of games (game number counter). ") May not be included, and the value" 1475 "or" 1473 "may be displayed.

  Next, at the time of "t6" (for example, the current game number is "1630"), in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, the above-mentioned downward replay is established and the RT gaming state is from the high RT gaming state (RT1) to the low RT gaming state Based on the transition to (RT0), the output of the signal during RT is ended. The gaming display device 1 does not make any special control change even if the input of the RT signal is ended. However, at this time, the counting of the number of medals acquired in the advantageous section by the advantageous section acquired number counter may be ended. As described above, the start point and the end point of the counting of the various counters described above (in particular, the advantageous section counter and the advantageous section acquisition number counter) can be arbitrarily set. That is, according to the specification of the gaming machine to be connected, etc., as long as more appropriate information for the player can be notified, the start time point or the end time point of counting at any time point of the above mentioned "t1" to "t6" It can be adopted as

  Next, at the time of "t7" (for example, the current number of games is "1725"), in the pachislot machine 2b, the BB described above is established and the gaming state is normal gaming state (bonus internal winning (RT2)) Output of the bonus in-progress signal is started based on the transition to the gaming state. When the input of the in-bonus signal is started, the game display device 1 ends the display of the normal state, and starts the display of the second state indicating that the bonus is in progress. Further, the gaming display device 1 increments the bonus number counter by one. In addition, the counting of the number of games by the game number counter is interrupted.

  Next, at the time of "t8" (for example, the current number of games is "1725"), in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, the BB described above ends and the gaming state changes from the BB gaming state to the normal gaming state (low RT gaming state (RT0 Based on the transition to), the output of the bonus in-progress signal is ended. When the input of the in-bonus signal is ended, the game display device 1 ends the display of the second state and starts the display of the normal state. In addition, the game display device 1 resumes the counting of the number of games by the game number counter. At this time, it is preferable that the gaming display device 1 count the number of medals acquired in the special gaming state (BB gaming state).

<Second Example of Timing Chart of Control Process of Display Device for Gaming 1 and Pachislot Machine 2b According to First Specification Example>
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a first example of a timing chart of control processing when the above-described gaming display device 1 and the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the above-described first specification example are connected, and more specifically 53 is a diagram showing a timing chart corresponding to a part of the second example of the main control processing of the game display device 1 described with reference to FIG.

  First, at the time of "t-1", in the Pachislo game machine 2b, the above-mentioned advantageous section start condition (for example, advantageous section start condition A) is satisfied and the gaming section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section. The output of the advantageous section signal is performed during one game or for a predetermined period (only once) (the output of the advantageous section signal is not continued during the advantageous section). When the advantageous segment signal is input, the game display device 1 starts displaying a specific state (first state) corresponding to the advantageous segment. Further, the game display device 1 adds “1” to the advantageous section number counter. Further, the gaming display device 1 starts counting the number of games during the advantageous section by the advantageous section counter and counting the number of medals acquired in the advantageous section by the advantageous section acquisition number counter.

  In the Pachi-Slot gaming machine 2b in this example, the game display device 1 is advantageous in that the output of the advantageous zone signal is performed during a single game or for a predetermined period (only once). Although the start of the section can be recognized, the start of the advantageous section may be recognized by another method. For example, when the section display area (section indicator) described above is provided in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, the advantageous section detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the section display area (section indicator) is lit is used for game display Provided on the device 1, the display device 1 for gaming based on the fact that the section display area (section indicator) described above is detected in the pachislot machine 2b at time "t-1". The various control processes described above may be performed. Thereby, even if the information indicating that the advantageous section is started is not transmitted to the game display device 1 in the specification of the game machine, it is appropriately advantageous in the game display device 1 connected to the game machine Information on the section can be displayed. Further, in this case, the above-described advantageous section detection sensor may detect turning on and off of the section display area (section indicator) described above. In this way, the gaming display device 1 can appropriately recognize not only the start of the advantageous section but also the end of the advantageous section even when the information on the advantageous section is not transmitted from the gaming machine. .

  Next, at the time of "t-2", in the pachislot machine 2b, a medal payout signal for three pulses is output based on the establishment of the special small role 2 described above and payout of three medals. . Even when the medal payout signal for three pulses is input, the gaming display device 1 does not particularly change the control. That is, it is determined that notification of the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player is not performed at least once in the advantageous section.

  Next, at the time of "t-3", in the pachislot machine 2b, a medal payout signal for nine pulses is output based on the fact that the above-mentioned specific small winning combination is realized and nine medals are paid out. When the display device 1 for gaming is input of the medal payout signal for 9 pulses, the display of the specific state (first state) corresponding to the advantageous section can be ended, so that the advantageous section ends. Turn on the possible flag. That is, it is considered that notification of the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player has been performed at least once in the advantageous section.

  Next, at time "t-4", when it is determined that the advantageous section has ended, the gaming display device 1 ends the display of the specific state (first state) corresponding to the advantageous section. Further, the gaming display device 1 turns off the advantageous section in-duration flag and the advantageous section end possible flag. Also, as in the first example, the gaming display device 1 finishes counting the number of games played in the advantageous section by the advantageous section counter and counting the number of medals acquired in the advantageous section by the advantageous section acquisition number counter. The count results by these counters are stored as a game history, and the count results by these counters are initialized (0 clear).

[Display Screen of Display Device for Gaming (Game Device) According to the First to Ninth Embodiments When the Gaming Machine of the First Specification Example is Connected]
Next, as to the display screen of the game display device (game device) according to the first to ninth embodiments described above when the game machine according to the first specification example described above is connected, FIGS. This will be described using FIG. 56 is an explanatory view showing a basic display screen of the above-described display device 1 for a game when the pachislot gaming machine 2b of the first specification example described above is connected, and FIG. 57 and FIG. FIG. 17 is an explanatory view showing a history display screen of the above-described game display device 1 when the pachislot gaming machine 2b of one specification example is connected. 56 to 58, an example in which various game information is displayed on the display surface (display unit) 1101 is described.

  As shown in FIG. 56, on the display surface (display section) 1101 of the game display device 1, a basic display area 1101a in which game information such as effect display, detailed game history display, graph display, etc. is displayed; A history display area 1101d is provided in which game information such as game history (the number of BBs, the number of advantageous sections, the current number of games) is displayed. Further, when the pachislot gaming machine 2b is in the advantageous section, the basic display area 1101a displays the number of games played during the advantageous section (total number of advantageous zone games) and the number of game media acquired in the advantageous section (total advantageous number of advantageous sections acquired) The advantageous section display areas 1101 b and 1101 c on which game information such as is displayed are provided.

  In FIG. 56, in the history display area 1101d, "2" is displayed as the number of transitions to the BB gaming state (the value of the number of bonus times counter) in the column "Number of BBs" today, “1” is displayed as the number of transitions to the advantageous section of the day (value of the advantageous section counter), and “500” is displayed as the number of today's games (value of the game counter) in the “current game number” field. It is done.

  Here, as described above, the value of the number-of-games counter may be displayed as it is in the "current number of games" column, or as shown in FIG. The number of games played in the normal gaming state in the normal section from (i.e., the number of games in which a relatively disadvantageous state continues) may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 58, in the advantageous section, the value of the advantageous section counter may be displayed. Further, in this case, as described above, a value obtained by removing the number of games played in the BB gaming state from the value of the advantageous section counter may be displayed. That is, in accordance with the specification of the gaming machine to be connected or the like, a numerical value relating to the number of games which the player seems most desired may be displayed. Also, the player or the game arcade may set which numerical value is displayed.

  Further, in FIG. 57, the basic display area 1101a, as an example of a detailed game history, the number of games when the game arcade was closed the day before (one day before) (normal gaming state from the end of the advantageous section or BB gaming state) Number of games) is the "500" game ("the previous day final"), the advantageous section starts on the "150" game of the day ("4 times ago"), and the "150" game after the advantageous section starts The BB game state starts in the eye ("3 times before"), the game ends in the "1475" game after the game start in the BB game state ("25" games) except for the game number of times ("25" game) "2 times ago"), BB game state starts ("1 time ago") at the "100" game after the end of the advantageous section, and the normal gaming state of the normal section after the BB game state ends The number of games played is the 200th game ("current"). It is shown.

  Further, in FIG. 57, the basic display area 1101a, as an example of the detailed game history, the total number of advantageous sections acquired (for example, the value of the advantageous section acquisition number counter) which is the number of game media acquired in a series of advantageous sections. Is to be displayed. That is, it is possible to check the history of how much gaming media have been acquired in the previous series of advantageous sections, even in the absence of the advantageous section. Further, in FIG. 57, the basic display area 1101a also displays the number of winning in the BB gaming state ("the number of winning") as an example of the detailed game history. Therefore, in the series of advantageous sections, it is also possible to confirm the breakdown of the number acquired in the BB gaming state and the number acquired in the normal gaming state.

  For example, in FIG. 57, the total acquisition number of advantageous sections in the series of advantageous sections is displayed as "1725", and the number of transitions to the BB gaming state in the series of advantageous sections is one and the number of acquisitions is "250". (For example, the payout number of BB gaming state in the first specification example. Here, the net addition number of BB gaming status in the first specification example may be displayed, and in that case, it becomes "200". Since it is displayed as), it can be confirmed that among the "1725" total number of advantageous sections acquired in the series of advantageous sections, "1475" are acquired in the normal gaming state.

  Further, in FIG. 58, as an example of the detailed game history in the basic display area 1101a, the BB gaming state starts at the "400" game after the advantageous section or the BB gaming state ends the day before (one day ago). ("2 days before the day before"), BB game state starts at the "300" game after the BB game state is over ("1 day before the day"), and the game is started after the BB game state is over The number of games until the closing time of the store is "500" game ("the previous day final"), the advantageous section starts at the "150" game today ("2 times ago"), and the advantageous section starts after It is the "1473" game after the advantageous section starts after the BB gaming state starts at the "150" game ("1 time ago") and the number of BB gaming states ("25" game) is excluded. ("Current") is displayed.

  Further, in FIG. 58, in the basic display area 1101a, instead of the advantageous section display areas 1101b and 1101c, an advantageous section end display area 1101e is provided, and the remaining game counts of the advantageous section are notified sequentially until the end of the advantageous section ( Display the advantageous section countdown). Note that the advantageous section end display area 1101 e is displayed in the basic display area 1101 a together with the advantageous section display areas 1101 b and 1101 c when the detailed section history display is started but the advantageous section countdown display is started. May be In addition, it may be the advantageous section end display area 1101e or the basic display area 1101a that notifies that the advantageous section is ended (performs the advantageous section end display).

[One Example of Flowchart of Control Processing of Display Device for Gaming (Game Device) According to the First to Ninth Embodiments when a Gaming Machine According to the Second Specification Example is Connected]
Next, FIG. 59 and an example of control processing of the game display device (game device) according to the first to ninth embodiments described above when the game machine according to the second specification example described above is connected, This will be described using FIG. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a third example of main control processing of the game display device 1 when the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example described above is connected, and FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a fourth example of main control processing of the game display device 1 when the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the two specification examples is connected. As described above, the main processing of the game display device 1 is executed by the control unit (for example, the display CPU 101 described above or the control circuit F10250 described above) that performs control related to display in the game display device 1 is there. Below, it demonstrates as a process which display CPU101 performs.

<Third Example of Main Control Processing of Display Device 1 for Games>
First, with reference to FIG. 59, a third example of the main control process of the game display device 1 will be described. In this third example, after the pachislot gaming machine 2b decides to start the advantageous section (the first advantageous section or the second advantageous section), the advantageous section (the first advantageous section or the second advantageous section) is selected. Continue to output the advantage section signal until it is decided to end (ie, the advantage section is started, during the advantage section, and the advantage section is ended to the game display device 1 side Can be recognized), and also from the start of a specific RT gaming state (high RT gaming state (RT2)) to the end of a specific RT gaming state (high RT gaming state (RT2)) during RT Continuously output a signal (ie, high RT gaming state (RT2) is started, high RT gaming state (RT2) is in progress, and high RT gaming state (RT2) is terminated) Can be recognized on the display device 1 side If it will be described as an example.

  In the third example, the first example described above, and the fourth example to be described later, as in the second example, various signals (for example, advantageous section signals and signals during RT) are provided on the pachislot machine 2b side. ) Is not output continuously (or not output at all), and it is determined whether or not the advantageous section is started and / or the advantageous section is ended (for example, By performing the advantageous section end determination process (see S135 in FIG. 53) or determination using the advantageous section detection sensor, the advantageous section is started, the advantageous section is in progress, and the advantageous section is ended. It can also be recognized that a particular RT gaming state is initiated, a particular RT gaming state is in progress, and a particular RT gaming state is ended.

  First, the display CPU 101 executes the power-on process (S150) as in S110 of the first example described above. Next, the display CPU 101 checks the input signal and the change thereof (S151), as in S111 of the first example described above. Next, the display CPU 101 determines whether the gaming section in the pachislot gaming machine 2b is an advantageous section, as in S112 of the first example described above (S152). If the display CPU 101 determines in S112 that the game section in the pachislot machine 2b is an advantageous section, the process proceeds to S153. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game section in the pachislot gaming machine 2b is not an advantageous section, the processing is shifted to S160.

  In S153, the display CPU 101 executes various counter update processing during the advantageous section, as in S113 of the first example described above (S153). In the third example and the fourth example described later, the display CPU 101 performs processing of adding “1” to the game number counter even when the gaming state is the specific gaming state (MB gaming state). That is, in the third example and the fourth example described later, the specified gaming state (MB gaming state) in the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example is treated as part of the normal gaming state and counted as the number of times played . However, as in the first example described above, the number of games in the specific gaming state (MB gaming state) may be excluded from the count targets of the game number counter.

  In addition, in the third example and the fourth example described later, the display CPU 101 does not perform processing of adding “1” to the bonus number counter. This is because, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example, when the specific gaming state (MB gaming state) occurs, the bonus in-progress signal is not output. However, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example, for example, the signal 1 during bonus is output when the MB1 gaming state occurs, and the signal 2 during bonus is output when the MB2 gaming state occurs. In some cases, the bonus number counter may be incremented by “1” based on these signals. Also, in this case, when the MB1 gaming state occurs, the first advantageous section also occurs at the same time, so when the MB1 gaming state occurs, the bonus number counter is not incremented by 1 (the advantageous section number counter When the MB2 gaming state occurs, "1" may be added to the bonus number counter.

  Further, in the third example and the fourth example described later, when the first advantageous section or the second advantageous section occurs, the display CPU 101 performs processing of adding “1” to the advantageous section number counter. In the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example, the same advantageous section signal is output regardless of which of the first advantageous section and the second advantageous section occurs. is there. However, in the pachislot machine 2b according to the second specification example, for example, the advantageous section signal 1 is output when the first advantageous section is generated, and the advantageous section signal 2 is output when the second advantageous section is generated. If the signal of the advantageous section 1 is input, the first advantageous section number counter is incremented by “1”, and if the advantageous section signal 2 is input, the second advantageous section number counter is incremented by “1”. You may do so. In this case, in the history display area 1101 d described above, “the number of first advantageous sections” which is the number of occurrences of the first advantageous section today and “the number of second advantageous sections” which is the number of occurrences of the second advantageous section. Should be displayed.

  In the third example and the fourth example described later, the display CPU 101 updates the IN number / OUT number counter, the advantageous section counter, and the advantageous section acquisition number counter, as in the first example described above. However, the advantageous interval counter and the advantageous interval acquisition number counter may be updated so as to be different from the first example described above. For example, when the second advantageous section is generated, the advantageous section counter or the advantageous section is selected from the transition to a specific RT gaming state (high RT gaming state (RT2)) (when the input of the signal during RT is started). The section acquisition number counter may be updated. Also in the third example and the fourth example described later, it is not necessary to always match the value of the advantageous section acquisition number counter with the display of the advantageous section acquisition number described above, and it is displayed so as to be a more appropriate display. The content may be changed as appropriate. Specific examples will be described later.

  Next, the display CPU 101 determines whether the RT signal is on (S154). That is, the display CPU 101 determines whether the gaming state of the pachislot gaming machine 2b is a specific RT gaming state (high RT gaming state (RT2)). If the display CPU 101 determines in S154 that the RT signal is on, the process proceeds to S155. On the other hand, if it is determined that the RT signal is not on, the process moves to S159.

  In S154, the display CPU 101 determines whether or not the in-RT signal is turned on from off (S155). That is, the display CPU 101 detects that the RT signal is off at the previous signal check (see S151), but the RT signal is on at the current signal check (S151) (ie, pachislot) It is determined whether the gaming state of the gaming machine 2b has shifted to a specific RT gaming state (high RT gaming state (RT2)). If the display CPU 101 determines in S155 that the during-RT signal is turned on from off, the process proceeds to step S156. On the other hand, if it is determined that the signal during RT is not turned on (is kept on) from off, the process moves to S158.

  In S156, the display CPU 101 executes pseudo bonus start display processing (S156). In this pseudo bonus start display process, the display CPU 101 is a process for notifying the player that a specific RT gaming state (high RT gaming state (RT2)) has started in the advantageous section (second advantageous section). I do. Here, in the pachislo gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example, in the advantageous section (second advantageous section), when the gaming state is the high RT gaming state (RT2), it is the most advantageous state for the player Therefore, in the game display device 1, the time when the advantageous section (the second advantageous section) and the high RT gaming state (RT2) are defined as being in the pseudo bonus (pseudo bonus) is the most advantageous. It is notified that the state starts. That is, in the game display device 1, information such as an image indicating that the pseudo bonus starts is displayed, and the start notification of the pseudo bonus is executed. In this case, for example, the effect display with the highest visual effect may be performed along with characters such as "simulation bonus start !!".

  Next, the display CPU 101 executes an acquired number display start process (S157). In this acquisition number display start process, the display CPU 101 sets the number of medals acquired by the advantageous section acquisition number counter from the start of the advantageous section (second advantageous section) to the start of the high RT gaming state (RT2) as described above. A process is performed to start display as the total number of obtained advantageous sections. That is, in this example, when the advantageous section (the second advantageous section) and the high RT gaming state (RT2) are defined as the pseudo bonus, the advantageous section total acquisition described above along with the start of the pseudo bonus is obtained. The display of the number is started. In the acquired number display start process, not only the total number of advantageous sections acquired above but also the display of the total number of advantageous sections may be started.

  Further, the display CPU 101 is from the start of the advantageous section (second advantageous section) to the start of the high RT gaming state (RT2) as in the case where the advantageous section is started after passing the standby section in the first example described above. In the period of, the updating process of the advantageous section acquisition number counter is suspended (provisionally counted, but it is not formally updated as the value of the advantageous section acquisition number counter), or the provisional section different from the advantageous section acquisition number counter The counting counter counts the number of medals acquired in that period, and in this acquisition number display start process, the advantageous zone acquisition number counter is updated to be counted back as the value of the advantageous interval acquired number counter You may Also, in this case, if the number of medals acquired in that period is a positive value (that is, one whose counting result indicates an increase in medals), such processing is performed, and a negative value (that is, counting) is performed. If the result indicates a decrease in medals), the advantageous section acquisition number counter is updated so that the value is not counted as the value of the advantageous section acquisition number counter, and the display in the acquisition number display start process is performed. An initial value (0) may be displayed as the total acquisition number of the above-described advantageous sections to be started. After executing the processing of S157, the display CPU 101 returns to the processing of S151.

  In S158, the display CPU 101 executes the third state display process (S158). In the third state display process, for example, the display CPU 101 is in an advantageous section (second advantageous section) and is in a specific RT gaming state (high RT gaming state (RT2)) (that is, a pseudo bonus Processing to notify the player that the As a result, in the gaming display device 1, information such as an image indicating that the current state is a pseudo bonus is displayed. In addition, as the display of the third state, for example, the effect display with the highest visual effect may be performed together with characters such as “during the pseudo bonus !!”. After executing the process of S158, the display CPU 101 returns to the process of S151.

  In S159, the display CPU 101 executes a first state display process (S159). In the first state display process, the display CPU 101 performs, for example, a process for informing the player that it is in an advantageous section (a first advantageous section or a second advantageous section). As a result, in the gaming display device 1, information such as an image indicating that the current state is an advantageous section (first state) is displayed. In addition, as the display of the first state, for example, effect display may be performed with a visual effect relatively lower than that of the third state together with characters such as “during advantageous section continuing!”. Also, for example, different displays may be performed in the first advantageous section and the second advantageous section. After executing the processing of S159, the display CPU 101 returns to the processing of S151.

  In S160, the display CPU 101 executes various counter update processing during the normal section (S160). In the various counter updating process during the normal section, the display CPU 101 appropriately updates counters such as the above-described game number counter, IN / OUT number counter, and bonus number counter, as in the process at S153.

  Next, the display CPU 101 determines whether the RT signal is on (S161). That is, the display CPU 101 determines whether the gaming state of the pachislot gaming machine 2b is a specific RT gaming state (high RT gaming state (RT2)). If the display CPU 101 determines in S161 that the RT signal is on, the display CPU 101 shifts the processing to S162. On the other hand, if it is determined that the RT signal is not on, the process proceeds to S163.

  In S162, the display CPU 101 executes a second state display process (S162). In the second state display process, the display CPU 101 performs, for example, a process for notifying the player that a specific RT gaming state (high RT gaming state (RT2)) is in progress. Thereby, in the gaming display device 1, information such as an image indicating that the current state is a specific RT gaming state (high RT gaming state (RT2)) is displayed. In addition, as the display of the second state, for example, effects such as “high RT in progress!” And the like may be displayed such that effect display relatively less in visual effect than the third state is performed. It should be noted that if the gaming section is not an advantageous section, the above-mentioned downward replay or downward symbol is immediately established to shift to the low RT gaming state (RT0), so when the gaming section is a normal section, the high RT gaming is When transitioning to the state (RT2), a special display (display of the second state) may not be performed, and the same process as the normal state display process described later may be performed. After executing the processing of S162, the display CPU 101 returns to the processing of S151.

  In S163, the display CPU 101 executes a normal state display process (S163). In the normal state display process, the display CPU 101 performs a process for notifying the player that the game is not in the advantageous section or in a specific RT gaming state (high RT gaming state (RT2)), for example. . However, the fact that the game is in the normal game mode of the normal section is not positively notified, and in the game display device 1, information such as an image showing a basic screen (initial screen) is displayed. After executing the processing of S163, the display CPU 101 returns to the processing of S151.

  As described above, according to the gaming display device 1 of this embodiment, the number of acquired game media is counted even in the advantageous section and not in the specific RT gaming state, and the specific RT is executed during the advantageous section. When the game state is reached, the number of game media acquired during the advantageous section is updated including the counting result, and the updated result is displayed. Therefore, even when the timing at which the advantageous section is started in the pachislot gaming machine 2b is different from the timing at which the most advantageous state is started, information on the number of game media acquired in the advantageous section is appropriately notified. be able to.

  Further, in this case, the display of the predetermined state (the first state) is performed when in the advantageous section and not in the specific RT gaming state, and when the advantageous section is in the specific RT gaming state, the identification is performed. The display of the state (third state) is performed. Thereby, even when the timing at which the advantageous section is started in the pachislot gaming machine 2b is different from the timing at which the most advantageous state is started, the information desired by the player is notified as appropriately as possible. Can.

<Fourth Example of Main Control Process of Display Device 1 for Games>
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a fourth example of the main control process of the game display device 1 will be described. In this fourth example, the aspect of the output of the signal from the pachislot machine 2b is basically the same as the third example described above.

  First, the display CPU 101 executes the power-on process (S170), as in S150 of the third example described above. Next, the display CPU 101 checks the input signal and the change thereof (S171), as in S151 of the third example described above. Next, the display CPU 101 determines whether the gaming section in the pachislot gaming machine 2b is an advantageous section, as in S152 of the third example described above (S172). If the display CPU 101 determines in S172 that the game section in the pachislot machine 2b is an advantageous section, the process proceeds to S173. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game section in the pachislot gaming machine 2b is not the advantageous section, the process is transferred to S179.

  In S173, the display CPU 101 executes various counter update processing during the advantageous section, as in S153 of the third example described above (S173). Next, the display CPU 101 determines whether the advantageous segment counter is "3" (S174). If the display CPU 101 determines that the advantageous segment counter is “3” in S174, the process proceeds to S175. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous segment counter is not "3", the process proceeds to S177.

  In S175, the display CPU 101 executes a first state display start process (S175). In the first state display start process, the display CPU 101 performs, for example, a process for starting to notify the player that the started advantageous section is the second advantageous section. As a result, in the gaming display device 1, information such as an image indicating that the current state is the second advantageous section (first state) is displayed. Here, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example, the display CPU 101 is advantageous because the first advantageous section (that is, the MB1 gaming state) is basically basically completed by 2 games at maximum. When the section continues three games or more, the started advantageous section is considered to be the second advantageous section, and that effect is notified. Note that as the display of the first state (specific state), for example, effects such as “during the second advantageous section continuing” may be displayed with a relatively high visual effect. Further, the number of games (value of the advantageous section counter) of the advantageous section in which the display of the first state is started in the first state display start processing can be arbitrarily set and changed.

  In addition, the maximum value of the number of game media that can be acquired in the first advantageous section (that is, the MB1 gaming state) is "19" for the number of payouts and "13" for the number of acquired (purely added) The display CPU 101 determines whether or not the advantageous section acquisition number counter exceeds "13" in S174, since it is three sheets, nine sheets, and the second game: three sheets, ten sheets). If it is determined that the advantageous section acquisition number counter exceeds "13", the process proceeds to S175. If it is determined that the advantageous section acquisition number counter does not exceed "13", the process proceeds to S177. You may

  Next, the display CPU 101 executes an acquired number display start process (S176). In the acquisition number display start process, the display CPU 101 described the number of medals acquired by the advantageous section acquisition number counter from the start of the advantageous section (second advantageous section) to the start of the display of the first state. A process is performed to start display as the total number of advantageous sections acquired. That is, in this example, when three games have passed since the start of the advantageous section, it is informed that the started advantageous section is the second advantageous section, so the advantageous section total acquisition described above in accordance with the notification The display of the number is started. In the acquired number display start process, not only the total number of advantageous sections acquired above but also the display of the total number of advantageous sections may be started.

  Further, as in the first example described above, the display CPU 101 starts the display of the first state after the start of the advantageous section (second advantageous section), as in the case where the advantageous section is started after the standby section. In the time period, update processing of the advantageous section acquisition number counter is suspended (provisionally counted, but not officially updated as the value of the advantageous section acquisition number counter), or a provisional count different from the advantageous section acquisition number counter The number of medals acquired in that period is counted by the counter, and in this acquisition number display start process, the advantageous period acquisition number counter is updated (backwardly) to be counted as the value of the advantageous period acquisition number counter. May be Also, in this case, if the number of medals acquired in that period is a positive value (that is, one whose counting result indicates an increase in medals), such processing is performed, and a negative value (that is, counting) is performed. If the result indicates a decrease in medals), the advantageous section acquisition number counter is updated so that the value is not counted as the value of the advantageous section acquisition number counter, and the display in the acquisition number display start process is performed. An initial value (0) may be displayed as the total acquisition number of the above-described advantageous sections to be started. After executing the process of S176, the display CPU 101 returns to the process of S171.

  In S177, the display CPU 101 determines whether the display of the first state has been started (S177). If the display CPU 101 determines in S177 that the display of the first state has been started, the process proceeds to S178. On the other hand, when it is determined that the display of the first state has not been started, the process returns to the process of S171. In addition, when the display of the first state is not started during the advantageous section, the display of the normal state to be described later may be performed, or the display of the predetermined state notified of at least the advantageous section You may

  In S178, the display CPU 101 executes a first state display process (S178). In the first state display process, the display CPU 101 performs, for example, a process for notifying the player that the advantageous section is the second advantageous section. The contents of the display of the first state are as described above. After executing the processing of S178, the display CPU 101 returns to the processing of S171.

  In S179, the display CPU 101 executes various counter update processing during the normal section, as in S160 of the third example described above (S179). Next, the display CPU 101 executes the normal state display process as in the case of S163 of the third example described above (S180). After executing the process of S180, the display CPU 101 returns to the process of S171. Also in this example, as in the third example described above, when the high RT gaming state (RT2) is the second advantageous section, the third state is displayed, and the second advantageous section is When not in the high RT gaming state (RT2), the display of the first state (different from the display of the first state of this example) is performed, and in the normal section and the high RT gaming state (RT2), the second state May be displayed.

  As described above, according to the gaming display device 1 of this example, when there are a plurality of advantageous sections (the first advantageous section and the second advantageous section) having different durations, the number of games in the advantageous sections is relative The display of a predetermined state is performed until a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times) predetermined in advance as the possible game number of the first advantageous section in which the period of time to be continued is short, and the specific number of times is exceeded It starts to display the status. Therefore, even in the case where the pachislot machine 2b has a plurality of advantageous sections having different durations, it is possible to appropriately notify information on which advantageous section is in the simple configuration.

  Further, in this case, as the display of the specific state is started, the display of the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section is also started. This makes it possible not only to more appropriately display information on the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section, but also to allow the player to have a sense of expectation and to improve the interest of the game.

[An example of a timing chart of each control processing in the case where a game display device (game device) according to the first to ninth embodiments and a game machine according to the second specification example are connected]
Next, an example of a timing chart of each control process when the gaming display device (gaming device) according to the first to ninth embodiments described above and the gaming machine according to the second specification example described above are connected Will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Third Example of Timing Chart of Control Process of Pachislo Game Machine 2b According to Display Example 1 for Game and Second Specification Example>
FIG. 61 is a view showing a third example of a timing chart of control processing in a case where the gaming display device 1 described above and the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example described above are connected, and more specifically FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a timing chart corresponding to a part of the third example of the main control process of the game display device 1 described with reference to FIG.

  First, at the time of "t-A", in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, the above-described advantageous section start condition (for example, advantageous section start condition A) is satisfied and the game section is shifted from the normal section to the first advantageous section. Based on the output of the advantage interval signal is started. When the input of the advantageous section signal is started, the game display device 1 starts displaying the first state indicating that the advantageous section is being performed. Further, the game display device 1 adds “1” to the advantageous section number counter. Further, the gaming display device 1 starts counting the number of games during the advantageous section by the advantageous section counter and counting the number of medals acquired in the advantageous section by the advantageous section acquisition number counter.

  It should be noted that, in the pachislot machine 2b, the time point of "t-A" is that the above-mentioned advantageous section start condition (for example, advantageous section start condition B) is satisfied and the gaming section is shifted from the normal section to the second advantageous section. On the basis of this, the output of the advantage interval signal may be started. Also in this case, when the input of the advantageous section signal is started, the game display device 1 similarly starts the display of the first state indicating that the advantageous section is in progress. Further, the game display device 1 adds “1” to the advantageous section number counter. Further, the gaming display device 1 starts counting the number of games during the advantageous section by the advantageous section counter and counting the number of medals acquired in the advantageous section by the advantageous section acquisition number counter.

  Next, at the time of "t-B", in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, the above-described advantageous section end condition (for example, advantageous section end condition A) is satisfied, and the game section is shifted from the first advantageous section to the normal section. On the basis of which the output of the advantage zone signal is terminated. When the input of the advantageous section signal is ended, the game display device 1 ends the display of the first state and starts the display of the normal state. Further, the display device for game 1 finishes counting the number of games during the advantageous section by the advantageous section counter and counting the number of medals acquired during the advantageous section by the advantageous section acquisition number counter, and counts the counting results by these counters. The game history is stored and the counting results of these counters are initialized (0 cleared).

  It should be noted that in the pachislot machine 2b, the gaming section has shifted from the normal section to the second advantageous section at the time of "t-B", but the gaming state has been described without shifting to the high RT gaming state (RT2). The output of the advantageous zone signal may be ended based on the advantageous zone end condition (for example, the advantageous zone end condition B) being satisfied and the game zone is shifted from the second advantageous zone to the normal zone. Also in this case, when the input of the advantageous section signal is ended, the game display device 1 ends the display of the first state and starts the display of the normal state. Further, the display device for game 1 finishes counting the number of games during the advantageous section by the advantageous section counter and counting the number of medals acquired during the advantageous section by the advantageous section acquisition number counter, and counts the counting results by these counters. The game history is stored and the counting results of these counters are initialized (0 cleared).

  Next, at the time of "t-C", in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, the above-mentioned rise replay 2 is established and the RT gaming state is shifted from the middle RT gaming state (RT1) to the high RT gaming state (RT2). On the basis of this, the output of the signal during RT is started. When the input of the RT in-progress signal is started, the game display device 1 starts displaying a second state indicating that a specific RT gaming state is in progress. However, as described above, when the game section is the normal section, even if the input of the RT in-progress signal is started, the special control change may not be performed. In this example, when the gaming section is a normal section but in a specific RT gaming state (for example, between “t-C” and “t-D” shown in FIG. 61), the medals of the period are A counter (counter for obtaining number during RT) may be provided to count the number of medals obtained during the period by the counter for acquiring number during RT. Further, this counting result and the fact that it has shifted to a specific RT gaming state may be able to be confirmed by the detailed gaming history described above.

  Next, at the time of "t-D", in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, the above-described downward replay or downward symbol is established, and the RT gaming state shifts from the high RT gaming state (RT2) to the low RT gaming state (RT0) Output of the RT signal is terminated. When the input of the RT signal is finished, the game display device 1 ends the display of the second state and starts the display of the normal state. In the case of providing the above-mentioned RT in-game acquisition number counter, the counting of the number of medals acquired in a specific RT gaming state by the counter is ended, and the counting result by the counter is stored as a game history, and the counter Initialize (zero clear) the counting result by.

  Next, at the time of "t-E", in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, the above-mentioned advantageous section start condition (for example, advantageous section start condition B) is satisfied, and the game section shifts from the normal section to the second advantageous section On the basis of, the output of the advantage interval signal is started. When the input of the advantageous section signal is started, the game display device 1 starts displaying the first state indicating that the advantageous section is being performed. Further, the game display device 1 adds “1” to the advantageous section number counter. Further, the gaming display device 1 starts counting the number of games during the advantageous section by the advantageous section counter and counting the number of medals acquired in the advantageous section by the advantageous section acquisition number counter.

  Next, at the time of "t-F", in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, the above-described rise replay 2 is established, and the RT gaming state is shifted from the middle RT gaming state (RT1) to the high RT gaming state (RT2). On the basis of this, the output of the signal during RT is started. When the input of the RT signal is started, the game display device 1 ends the display of the first state, and is in an advantageous section and in a specific RT gaming state (during a bonus bonus) Start displaying the third state indicating. In addition, the gaming display device 1 adds up the number of medals that have been counted by the advantageous section acquisition number counter (or the other counters described above) between "t-E" and "t-F". The display of the total number of advantageous sections acquired as described above is started. That is, the display shows the number of medals acquired during the pseudo bonus in this example, but when the number of the displayed number is in the second advantageous section and not in the specific RT gaming state The number of medals won is reflected.

  Next, at the time of "t-G", in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, the above-described advantageous section end condition (for example, advantageous section end condition B) is satisfied, and the game section is shifted from the second advantageous section to the normal section On the basis of which the output of the advantage zone signal is terminated. When the input of the advantageous section signal is ended, the game display device 1 ends the display of the third state and starts the display of the normal state. In this case, the display of the third state may be ended and the display of the second state may be started. Further, the display device for game 1 finishes counting the number of games during the advantageous section by the advantageous section counter and counting the number of medals acquired during the advantageous section by the advantageous section acquisition number counter, and counts the counting results by these counters. The game history is stored and the counting results of these counters are initialized (0 cleared).

  Next, at the time of "t-H", in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, the above-described downward replay or downward symbol is established, and the RT gaming state shifts from the high RT gaming state (RT2) to the low RT gaming state (RT0) Output of the RT signal is terminated. The gaming display device 1 does not make any special control change even if the input of the RT signal is ended.

  As shown in FIG. 61, at the time of "t-G", in the pachislot machine 2b, the advantageous section end condition (for example, advantageous section end condition B) is satisfied and the game display device 1 is established. When the output of the advantageous section signal is terminated based on the section transitioning from the second advantageous section to the normal section, at the time of "t-H", the above-mentioned descent replay or descent in the pachislot machine 2b Based on the symbol being established and the RT gaming state transitioning from the high RT gaming state (RT2) to the low RT gaming state (RT0), the display of the third state is continued until the output of the RT in-progress signal is ended. You may do it. Also, in this case, the counting of the number of games in the advantageous section by the advantageous section counter and the counting of the number of medals acquired in the advantageous section by the advantageous section counter are continued until the time of "t-H". It is also good.

  As described above, also in this example, the start time point and the end time point of the counting of the various counters described above (in particular, the advantageous section counter and the advantageous section acquisition number counter) can be arbitrarily set. That is, as long as information more appropriate for the player can be notified, counting starts at any of the above-mentioned "t-E" to "t-H" according to the specification of the connected gaming machine, etc. It can be adopted as a point in time or an end point.

<Fourth Example of Timing Chart of Control Process of Display Device for Gaming 1 and Pachislot Machine 2b According to Second Specification Example>
62 and 63 are diagrams showing a fourth example of a timing chart of control processing when the above-described gaming display device 1 and the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the above-described second specification example are connected, More specifically, FIG. 60 shows a timing chart corresponding to a part of the fourth example of the main control process of the game display device 1 described above.

(An example of a timing chart in the first advantageous section)
FIG. 62 shows an example of a timing chart when the first advantageous section is generated in the pachi-slot machine 2b according to the second specification example.

  First, at the time of "t-a1", in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, the above-mentioned advantageous section start condition (for example, advantageous section start condition A) is satisfied and the game section is shifted from the normal section to the first advantageous section Based on the output of the advantage interval signal is started. At this point in time, the game display device 1 does not change the control of the special display contents, and counts the number of games during the advantageous section by the advantageous section counter, and the number of medals acquired in the advantageous section by the advantageous section acquisition number counter Start counting.

  Next, at the time of "t-b1", in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, a medal insertion signal for three pulses is output based on the fact that three medals are inserted and the start operation is performed. The game display device 1 adds “1” to the advantageous section counter. Further, the gaming display device 1 subtracts “3” from the advantageous section acquisition number counter.

  Next, at the time of "t-c1", in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, a medal payout signal for nine pulses is output based on the establishment of the specific small winning combination. The game display device 1 adds “9” to the advantageous section acquisition number counter.

  Next, at the time of "t-d1", in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, the medal insertion signal for three pulses is output based on the fact that three medals are inserted and the start operation is performed. The game display device 1 adds “1” to the advantageous section counter. Further, the gaming display device 1 subtracts “3” from the advantageous section acquisition number counter.

  Next, at the time of "t-e1", in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, a medal payout signal for 10 pulses is output based on the establishment of the MB middle and small winning combination. The game display device 1 adds “10” to the advantageous section acquisition number counter. Here, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, the output of the advantageous section signal is ended based on the advantageous section end condition (for example, the advantageous section end condition A) being satisfied and the gaming section is shifted from the first advantageous section to the normal section. Be done. The game display device 1 finishes counting the number of games played in the advantageous section by the advantageous section counter and counting the number of medals acquired in the advantageous section by the advantageous section acquisition number counter, and counts the counting results by these counters. , And initialize (zero clear) the counting results of these counters.

  Next, at the time of "t-f1", in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, a medal insertion signal for three pulses is output based on the fact that three medals are inserted and the start operation is performed. The gaming display device 1 does not make any special control change. As described above, when the generated advantageous section is the first advantageous section, notification that it is the advantageous section is not actively made.

(An example of a timing chart in the second advantageous section)
FIG. 63 shows an example of a timing chart when the second advantageous section is generated in the pachi-slot machine 2b according to the second specification example.

  First, at the time of "t-a2", in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, the above-mentioned advantageous section start condition (for example, advantageous section start condition B) is satisfied and the gaming section is shifted from the normal section to the second advantageous section Based on the output of the advantage interval signal is started. At this point in time, the game display device 1 does not change the control of the special display contents, and counts the number of games during the advantageous section by the advantageous section counter, and the number of medals acquired in the advantageous section by the advantageous section acquisition number counter Start counting.

  Next, at the time of "t-b2", in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, a medal insertion signal for three pulses is output based on the fact that three medals are inserted and the start operation is performed. The game display device 1 adds “1” to the advantageous section counter. Further, the gaming display device 1 subtracts “3” from the advantageous section acquisition number counter.

  Next, at the time of "t-c2", in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, a medal payout signal for nine pulses is output based on the establishment of the specific small winning combination. The game display device 1 adds “9” to the advantageous section acquisition number counter.

  Next, at the time of "t-d2", in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, a medal insertion signal for three pulses is output based on the fact that three medals are inserted and the start operation is performed. The game display device 1 adds “1” to the advantageous section counter. Further, the gaming display device 1 subtracts “3” from the advantageous section acquisition number counter.

  Next, at the time of "t-e2", in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, a medal payout signal for nine pulses is output based on the establishment of the specific small winning combination. The game display device 1 adds “9” to the advantageous section acquisition number counter.

  Next, at the time of "t-f2", in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, a medal insertion signal for three pulses is output based on the fact that three medals are inserted and the start operation is performed. The game display device 1 adds “1” to the advantageous section counter. Further, the gaming display device 1 subtracts “3” from the advantageous section acquisition number counter. At this time, since the advantageous section counter has become “3”, the game display device 1 starts displaying the first state indicating that the advantageous section is in progress, and based on the value of the advantageous section acquisition number counter The display of the total number of advantageous sections acquired as described above is started. As described above, when it is considered that the advantageous section is generated and the generated advantageous section is the second advantageous section, it is positively reported that it is the advantageous section.

  Next, at the time of "t-g2", in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, a medal payout signal for three pulses is output based on the establishment of the replay role. The game display device 1 adds “3” to the advantageous section acquisition number counter. At this time, the display of the first state and the display of the total number of obtained advantageous sections described above are continued.

  As mentioned above, although embodiment which concerns on this invention was described, this invention is not limited to said each embodiment, a modification, etc.

  The gaming display device is not limited to one that detects the state of the gaming machine based on various signals output from the external relay terminal board of the gaming machine and performs various controls. For example, various types of control may be performed by detecting the state of the gaming machine using various detection devices such as the above-described advantageous section detection sensor (not shown). That is, the gaming machine side does not output a signal, but the information necessary for performing various controls on the gaming display device side can be provided by appropriately providing on the gaming display device a detection device capable of acquiring the information. It should be made to be acquired. In this case, it is preferable that these various detection devices be configured to be removable from the game display device. In this way, it is possible to provide an inexpensive game display device in its basic specifications while improving the extensibility of the game display device by enabling connection with various game machines.

  In addition, in the gaming machine connectable to the game display device, when the above-described section display area (section indicator) is provided and a plurality of advantageous sections are installed, the above-described section display area ( An advantageous section (for example, the above-mentioned second advantageous section) in which the section indicator is lit, and an advantageous section (for example, the above-described first advantageous section) in which the above-mentioned section display area (section indicator) is not lit You may do so.

  Further, in the gaming machine connectable to the display device for gaming, when the standby section is provided in the advantageous section, the advantageous section signal is also output during the standby section, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The output of the advantageous section signal may be started when the section signal is not output and the transition from the standby section to the advantageous section (for example, when the symbol combination of BB is stopped and displayed on the effective line) is started. Further, the output of the advantageous section signal may be started at the same timing as the lighting start timing of the section display area (section indicator) described above.

  As the game display device, different screen units may be applied to each game machine, or the same screen unit may be applied to so-called island units.

  The gaming display device may be configured as a transmissive projector device and may be configured to be replaceable with screen units having different screen configurations. For example, the projector main body is installed on the upper surface or the side surface of the housing May be Also, for example, light projected from the projector main body may be directly incident on the back side incident surface of the screen without using a reflector.

  The replaceable types of the screen unit are not limited to the three types in the above-described embodiment, and may be two types or four or more types as long as the form of the screen is different. Also, the material of the screen may be different without being limited to the form of the screen.

  The position of the light emitting surface is not limited to the left and right ends of the front surface, and may be, for example, the upper or lower portion of the front surface, or the side surface.

  The second display surface is not limited to the above-described shape, and may have, for example, a parallelogram, a diamond shape, or a circular shape as long as it has a thickness in front of the first display surface.

  The operation unit including the button may be integrally provided on the screen unit.

  The movable decorative sheet and the fixed decorative sheet are not limited to the side surfaces, and may be provided, for example, behind the light emitting surface on the front side.

  The light source used for the movable decorative sheet or the fixed decorative sheet is not limited to the LED, and may be, for example, an EL (Electro luminescence) element or a light bulb.

  The light guide holes in the movable decorative sheet or the fixed decorative sheet may have different sizes, for example, the diameter of the light guide holes in the rear decorative sheet near the LED may be relatively large, while the front surface far from the LED The diameter of the light guide holes in the side decorative sheet may be relatively small. Alternatively, the diameter of the light guide holes in the rear side decorative sheet may be relatively small, and the diameter of the light guide holes in the front side decorative sheet may be relatively large. As described above, by making the sizes of the two light guide holes different from each other, a sufficient clearance is secured between the light guide holes in the overlapping state or in the non-overlapping state, and the movement amount of the movable decorative sheet is sufficiently large. It can be secured.

  When replacing the screen unit, it may be necessary to change the projection data corresponding to the projection image or to optically correct the projection image because the form and characteristics of the screen are different. In order to cope with such a case, the control unit of the game display device stores in advance setting information relating to projection image data and optical correction data according to the form of each screen, etc., and corresponds to each screen. The setting information may be called and applied.

  Moreover, in order to realize a configuration in which the corresponding setting information can be applied when replacing the screen unit, (1) a process of determining whether or not the LED substrate (cable) is connected by the control unit is provided. A separate control device is provided, and when replacing the screen unit, when the control unit of the chassis is started, the control device sends a specific command to the control unit, and the control unit in which screen unit is connected is the control unit (3) A setting screen may be displayed by operating the button of the operation unit, and the administrator may input the type of screen unit after replacement on the setting screen as setting information. .

  Such setting information can be said to be information that determines what projection method (method) is used to project one image data. Further, the setting information may be changeable from the server device as a hall computer, or when it is changed in one game display device by the master-slave method, the other game display devices are similarly changed. May be

  With regard to the movable decorative sheet, when the game display device receives a game state signal from the game machine, or when the lighting or blinking of the LED is performed, such as when the game display device detects a certain number of winnings, It may be moved in a direction to increase the contrast.

  For example, when performing interlocking production in the island or the same model interlocking production for a plurality of display devices for gaming, by operating the drive mechanism corresponding to the movable decorative sheet of each display device for gaming along with the interlocking production, Movable decorative sheets in a plurality of game display devices may be varied at the same time.

  The summary of the present invention will be listed below based on the above embodiments.

  In the conventional gaming machine, light is projected upward from the projection means provided below the housing, and the light is reflected forward from the reflecting surface provided inside the housing, There is a display device provided with a so-called transmission type projector device that projects an image on a front screen (projected portion) as a display device (see, for example, JP-A-2005-99743).

  Further, as a display device of this type, there is a game display device for displaying various information related to a game corresponding to a game machine, and it has been proposed to configure such a game display device by a projector device. .

  However, in recent years, the display device of the game display device according to the layout and visual effects of the game arcade and the design of the corresponding game machine is desired, and the projector device is applied to the game display device. However, such display forms can not be freely changed, and there is room for improvement in the design and diversity of the display forms.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned points. For example, the display form can be freely changed according to the game arcade or the game machine, and the design and the diversity of the display form can be enhanced. It is an object of the present invention to provide a display device.

(Appendix A1)
A game display device (for example, the game display device 1) according to one aspect of the present invention includes projection means (for example, a projector main body 12) for projecting light for displaying information about a game as a projection image; A light passing surface (for example, the opening surface 10A) through which the light projected from the means passes and a projection target (for example, screens 110A to 110C) on which the projected image is projected by transmitting the light passing through the light passing surface. And the projection target has a display surface (for example, (first) display surface 1101 and second display surfaces 1101B and 1101C) on which the projection image is projected, and the light projection surface It is characterized in that it is arranged replaceably, and the display surface is configured to be able to change the visual impression of the projected image in response to the replacement of the projection part.

  According to such a configuration, since the visual impression of the projected image on the display surface can be changed by replacing the projection part, for example, the projection part is replaced according to the layout of the game arcade or the design of the gaming machine. It is possible to freely change the display mode, and to enhance the design and diversity of the display mode.

(Appendix A2)
The preferred embodiment of the present invention has at least another display surface (e.g., light emitting surface 111a) different from the display surface, and the other display surface can be displayed by a method different from the display of a projected image. It is characterized by being.

  According to such a configuration, information on a game can be displayed by being divided into a display surface for displaying a projected image and another display surface. Further, for example, on the other display surface, displaying a projected image Since display by another method is possible, the design and variety of the display form can be further enhanced.

  In the conventional gaming machine, light is projected upward from the projection means provided below the housing, and the light is reflected forward from the reflecting surface provided inside the housing, There is a display device provided with a so-called transmission type projector device that projects an image on a front screen (projected portion) as a display device (see, for example, JP-A-2005-99743).

  Further, as a display device of this type, there is a game display device for displaying various information related to a game corresponding to a game machine, and it has been proposed to configure such a game display device by a projector device. . Among such projector apparatuses, there is also a projector apparatus in which the visual effect is enhanced by deforming the screen in a concavo-convex shape (see, for example, JP 2012-147828 A).

  However, in the case described in JP 2012-147828 A, since the entire front and back of the screen is uneven, the projection distance from the projection means to the screen becomes significantly uneven according to the unevenness, and such uneven When the screen of the above is applied to a transmission type projector device, there is a problem that the adjustment and arrangement of optical systems such as a projection lens and a reflection surface become complicated.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and provides a game display device capable of easily enhancing visual effects while having a simple configuration without complicating an optical system for projection. The purpose is

(Appendix B1)
A game display device (for example, the game display device 1) according to one aspect of the present invention includes projection means (for example, a projector main body 12) for projecting light for displaying information about a game as a projection image; A projection unit (e.g., screens 110A to 110C) on which a projection image is projected by light projected from the unit; the projection unit is an incident surface (e.g., for example) on which the light projected from the projection unit is incident And an incident surface 1100), and a display surface (for example, (first) display surface 1101, second display surfaces 1101B and 1101C) on which a projected image is projected by transmitting light incident on the incident surface. And the incident surface is a uniform surface, and the display surface is divided into a first region (for example, the first display surface 1101) and a thickness different from the first region. Area (eg, second示面 1101B, and having at least a 1101C).

  According to such a configuration, since the incident surface of the projection portion is a uniform surface and the distance from the projection unit to the incident surface is constant, an optical system for projection from the projection unit to the incident surface is used. The visual effects can be easily enhanced by changing the visual impression of the projected image simply by making the thickness different between the first area and the second area of the display surface, while the configuration can be simplified. it can.

(Appendix B2)
A preferred embodiment of the present invention comprises a light passage surface (e.g., an opening surface 10A) through which light projected from the projection means passes, and the projection target is disposed replaceably with respect to the light passage surface. It is characterized by being.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the visual impression of the projected image on the display surface simply by replacing the projection parts arranged on the light passage surface, so that the display form can be freely changed. , And can enhance the design and diversity of display modes.

  A conventional gaming machine is provided with a sheet member (decorative sheet), and the back side of the sheet member is irradiated with light to make the pattern (image) drawn on the sheet member visible from the front side, thereby providing visual effects. There exist some which improved the effect (for example, refer Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2013-165868).

  In addition, there is a gaming display device that displays various types of information related to gaming corresponding to gaming machines, and it has been proposed to apply a sheet member to such a gaming display device.

  However, it is difficult to adjust the contrast of light displayed on the sheet member because it is difficult to adjust the contrast of light due to the characteristics of the relatively thin sheet member according to the characteristics described in the above-mentioned JP-A-2013-165868. There was a drawback of that.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described points, and can easily change the contrast of the image displayed on the sheet member, and thus can easily enhance the visual effect, and It aims at providing a game machine.

(Appendix C1)
A game display device (for example, the game display device 1) according to one aspect of the present invention includes a light emitting unit (for example, an LED 20A) that emits light, and guides light from the light emitting unit to the front surface A plurality of sheet members (e.g., movable decorative sheet 30, fixed decorative sheet 40) having a plurality of light guiding portions (e.g., light guiding holes 30A, 40A) and arranged to face each other; Among the sheet members, at least one sheet member (for example, the movable decorative sheet 30) can be displaced relative to the other sheet member (for example, the fixed decorative sheet 40) so as to be between the first position and the second position. And driving means (for example, a driving mechanism 32) for moving, and when the one sheet member is in the first position, the plurality of light guiding portions of the one sheet member is the other sheet member. When the one sheet member is partially or entirely overlapped with the plurality of light guiding portions and the one sheet member is moved from the first position to the second position, the plurality of light guiding portions of the one sheet member are: It is characterized in that it is in a state of being displaced with respect to the plurality of light guiding portions of the other sheet member.

  According to such a configuration, for example, as one sheet member moves from the first position to the second position, the overlapping portion of the light guide portions in both sheet members gradually becomes smaller, The light guided from the light emitting means on the back side to the front side through the light part gradually decreases. That is, one sheet member can be appropriately displaced relative to the other sheet member, and the illuminance can be changed according to the degree of overlap between the two light guide portions, so that display is performed by a plurality of sheet members facing each other The contrast of the resulting image can be easily changed by illumination adjustment, and thus the visual effect can be easily enhanced.

(Appendix C2)
In a preferred embodiment of the present invention, a projection unit (for example, a projector main body 12) for projecting light for displaying information on a game as a projection image and a main body portion (for example, a housing 10) for containing the projection unit A projection unit (for example, screens 110A to 110C) on which a projection image is projected by the light projected from the projection unit; and a cover unit (for example, a screen for covering the main unit while holding the projection unit Units 11A to 11C), the one sheet member is provided on the main body portion, the other sheet member is provided on the cover portion, and the cover portion is replaced with the main body portion It is characterized by being possible.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the visual impression of the projected image in the projection section by replacing the cover section integrally with the projection section, and for example, according to the layout of the game arcade or the design of the game machine The display form of the projected image can be freely changed simply by replacing the cover portion, and the design and versatility of the display form can be enhanced.

(Appendix C3)
A gaming machine according to another aspect of the present invention (for example, pachinko gaming machine 2a, pachislot gaming machine 2b) includes light emitting means (for example, LED 20A) for emitting light, and light from the light emitting means from the back side to the front side A plurality of sheet members (for example, movable decorative sheet 30, fixed decorative sheet 40) having a plurality of light guiding parts (for example, light guiding holes 30A, 40A) for guiding A first position and a second position in which at least one of the plurality of sheet members (for example, the movable decorative sheet 30) is displaceable relative to the other sheet member (for example, the fixed decorative sheet 40); And driving means (for example, a driving mechanism 32) for moving between the two sheet members, and when the one sheet member is in the first position, the plurality of light guiding portions of the one sheet member are the other Partially or entirely overlapping the plurality of light guides of the sheet member, and when the one sheet member is moved from the first position to the second position, the plurality of light guides of the one sheet member The light portion is in a state of being displaced with respect to the plurality of light guiding portions of the other sheet member.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize a gaming machine that exhibits the same effects as the gaming display device according to one aspect of the present invention.

  As a gaming system including a gaming display device and a gaming machine, for example, the one described in JP-A-2015-96100 is known. However, in this gaming system, since it does not have the configuration or function as a gaming display device or gaming machine as in the present invention, it has not been possible to improve the interest. The present invention has been made in view of these points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a game display device and a game machine capable of improving interest.

(Appendix D1)
According to one aspect of the present invention, there is provided a game display device comprising: projection means for projecting light for displaying information relating to a game as a projected image; a light passage surface through which light projected from the projection means passes; And a projection target onto which a projection image is projected by transmitting light passing through the transmission surface, the projection projection portion having a display surface onto which the projection image is projected, the light projection surface It is characterized in that it is arranged replaceably, and the display surface is configured to be able to change the visual impression of the projected image in response to the replacement of the projection part.

  According to such a configuration, since the visual impression of the projected image on the display surface can be changed by replacing the projection part, for example, the projection part is replaced according to the layout of the game arcade or the design of the gaming machine. It is possible to freely change the display mode, and to enhance the design and diversity of the display mode.

(Appendix D2)
A preferred embodiment of the present invention is characterized in that it has at least another display surface different from the display surface, and the other display surface is capable of displaying in a manner different from the display of a projected image. .

  According to such a configuration, information on a game can be displayed by being divided into a display surface for displaying a projected image and another display surface. Further, for example, on the other display surface, displaying a projected image Since display by another method is possible, the design and variety of the display form can be further enhanced.

  Further, the present invention relates to a gaming display device corresponding to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine.

  In the conventional gaming machine, light is projected upward from the projection means provided below the housing, and the light is reflected forward from the reflecting surface provided inside the housing, There is a display device provided with a so-called transmission type projector device that projects an image on a front screen (projected portion) as a display device (see, for example, JP-A-2005-99743).

  Further, as a display device of this type, there is a game display device for displaying various information related to a game corresponding to a game machine, and it has been proposed to configure such a game display device by a projector device. .

  However, in recent years, the display device of the game display device according to the layout and visual effects of the game arcade and the design of the corresponding game machine is desired, and the projector device is applied to the game display device. However, such display forms can not be freely changed, and there is room for improvement in the design and diversity of the display forms.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a game display device capable of enhancing the design and diversity of display modes and visual effects.

(Appendix E1)
In order to achieve the above object, a gaming display device according to the present invention is provided in a casing (10) of a gaming display device and is projection means for projecting light for displaying information on a game as a projection image In a gaming display having a (projector main body 12) and a projection target (screens 110A to 110F) onto which the projection image is projected, at least one edge of the projection (for example, the projection target) A base (70) provided in the vicinity of the lower edge and on which at least one light emitting element is mounted, and an edge (for example, an upper edge of the projection) opposite to the edge of the projection It is characterized by comprising a diffuse reflection portion (72) provided, and a light shielding member (73) provided in a gap portion formed between the base and the casing.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the visual effect and the decorative effect of the display form by providing the light emitting means for bordering at least one edge of the projection screen in addition to the projection image by the projection means.

  In addition, by preventing the generation of the leaked light from the light emitting element to the inside of the housing, the irradiation efficiency is enhanced, and the brightness and the resolution of the projection image projected onto the projection portion are not affected.

(Appendix E2)
Further, in the game display device according to the present invention, the projection target includes a light guiding portion (incident surface 1100) and a display portion (display surface 1101) each having a predetermined thickness, and the light guiding portion is formed of the light emitting element Light is guided to the irregular reflection portion. According to the present invention, light from the light emitting element can be efficiently guided to the irregular reflection portion.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game display device capable of enhancing the design and diversity of display modes and visual effects.

  The present invention also relates to a gaming apparatus corresponding to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine.

  Various gaming devices are connected to the conventional gaming machine, and control based on information transmitted from the gaming machine is performed. For example, a gaming display device (so-called data display device) for displaying statistical information such as gaming results can be connected to the gaming machine. The game display device can display game information such as the number of hits such as a bonus game, the number of games after the end of the game state, and the number of medals obtained during the game state. No. 2).

  Generally, a display button for gaming is provided with a call button, and when a trouble occurs in the gaming machine, a lamp or the like provided on the display device for gaming is obtained by the player pressing the call button. The corner lights on the corners of the island are lit, making it possible to draw the attention of the staff.

  By the way, a general call button is a movable type that moves in the pressing direction when pressed by a player, and lighting control of the lamp is performed based on a signal from a sensor that detects the movement. In such a movable call button, water, dust and the like easily enter because there is a gap in the moving part structurally, and further, when a trouble occurs in the gaming machine, a player who wants to continue the game quickly calls There is a possibility that the operation place may be fatigued because the button is continuously hit and a failure due to these may easily occur. Also, since the player pays attention to playing the game mainly at the normal time, it is rare to pay attention to the arrangement mode of such a call button, and the call is made for the first time when any trouble occurs. We often look for where the button is placed. Therefore, it is preferable that the call button be disposed at a position easy for the player to understand.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming apparatus capable of reducing the possibility of a failure and of making it easy for the player to understand the operation location. .

(Appendix F1)
In order to achieve the above object, in the gaming apparatus (gaming apparatus F1) according to the present invention, a design unit (design unit F1021b) having translucency in a touch area (touch area F1021a) touched by the player An exterior panel (exterior panel F1021) provided, and a touch sensor (touch sensor) having translucency, provided on the back side of the exterior panel in association with the touch area, and detecting touch input to the touch area F1022), a light source (LED array F1024), a light guide plate (light guide plate F1023) which is provided on the back side of the touch sensor and guides light from the light source toward the design portion of the exterior panel; And control means (control circuit F10250) for performing lighting control.

  According to the above configuration, when there is a touch input from the player in the touch area, the touch sensor detects the touch input. On the other hand, the control means is turned on by the lighting control of the light source, and the light from the light source is guided to the design unit, and the player can visually recognize the light from the design unit. With such a configuration, the design portion in the touch area of the exterior panel is illuminated by the light from the light source, so that the player can easily recognize the place to be touched, and it is not movable as in the conventional call button. Since the input is performed on the touch area formed in a plane, it is possible to prevent a failure due to dust or the like entering the operating place or a failure due to fatigue of the movable part.

(Appendix F2)
In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The control means may perform control to change the lighting mode of the light source when there is a touch input to the touch area.

  According to the above configuration, the player can recognize that his / her touch has been input by changing the lighting mode of the light source that illuminates the design portion. This makes it possible to prevent the player from touching the touch area many times until an attendant is called, and the surface of the touch area being degraded.

(Appendix F3)
In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
A light guide plate (light guide plate G61) having a light transmitting property that is detachably disposed on a base (base G101) and has an opening (opening G61a) of a predetermined shape penetrating in the thickness direction, and the light guide plate A plurality of light guide plate light sources (LED G60A) respectively disposed at positions facing the opening side end face (opening side end face G61b) forming the opening, the plurality of light guide plate light sources being on the opening side The light guide plate is disposed in parallel along the end face, and the light guide plate guides part of the light guided from the light sources for the light guide plate into the light guide plate via the opening side end face, A reflective portion (reflective portion G61d) subjected to reflection processing to be reflected in the thickness direction of the light plate is formed, and the control means is a light source for the plurality of light guide plates when there is a touch input to the touch area. Change to a specific lighting mode Your the may be performed.

  According to the above configuration, in accordance with the player's touch input, the light emitted from the plurality of light sources becomes a specific lighting mode, and spreads radially in the light guide plate to reach the outer end face, thereby surrounding the light guide plate It is possible to illuminate the whole in a ring shape, and the light guide plate illuminated in a specific lighting mode becomes visible from any direction of the game apparatus, and the game arcade manager It becomes easy to identify the gaming machine to which the device is attached. Furthermore, the designability can be improved by the light emitted from the surface of the light guide plate, and since the light guide plate is detachable from the base, it can be replaced by a light guide plate subjected to reflection processing of different designs. It becomes possible to apply the gaming machine to various types of gaming machines.

(Appendix F4)
In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The control means may perform control to change lighting modes of the plurality of light source for light guide plate according to an elapsed time from a timing when there is a touch input to the touch area.

  According to the above configuration, the manager of the game arcade can recognize at a glance even the position away from the gaming machine by visually recognizing the lighting mode of the light guide plate from the time when the player performs the touch input, Even in the case where there are a plurality of gaming devices for which touch input has been performed, it is possible to give priority to the corresponding, which makes it possible to provide a suitable service to the player.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to reduce the possibility of failure and to provide a gaming apparatus in which the player can easily understand the operation location.

  The present invention also relates to a gaming apparatus corresponding to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine.

  In a game arcade where a game machine is installed, various game devices are connected to the game machine. In such a gaming machine, various controls are performed based on information transmitted from the gaming machine. As one of such gaming machines, a gaming information display unit (both a data display unit and each stand display unit) that enables display of statistical information such as game results and display of the gaming state of the gaming machine etc. Say). The player can select a gaming machine to play a game, using various information displayed on such a gaming information display device as a clue.

  In recent years, in the gaming information display device connected to a gaming machine capable of operating a specific game state and a special game state different from each other, the start condition is an advantageous game state advantageous to the player. What made it possible to perform effect display of a different content with effect display in a special gaming state is proposed (for example, refer to JP, 2015-96100, A).

  By the way, when there are a plurality of gaming states as an advantageous gaming state as in the gaming machine described above, a series of gaming machines may be used even if these gaming states are mutually transferred in practice. It may be managed as an advantageous gaming state (advantage zone). In addition, in such a gaming machine, when such an advantageous section continues for a certain period of time, control may be performed to forcibly end the advantageous section from the viewpoint of soundness of prosperity.

  Here, for example, when management and control of such an advantageous section are performed on the gaming machine side, it is necessary for the gaming apparatus side to perform control in accordance therewith. In particular, in order to notify the player of various types of information, it is required to appropriately notify the information desired by the player as much as possible.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and even in a gaming machine, even when a plurality of advantageous gaming states are managed as a series of advantageous sections, information desired by the player can be obtained. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming apparatus capable of notifying as appropriate.

(Appendix G1)
In order to achieve the above object, a gaming apparatus according to the present invention is:
When a predetermined start condition (for example, an advantageous section start condition) is satisfied, an advantageous section advantageous to the player is started, and when a predetermined end condition (for example, an advantageous section end condition) is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended. The game has a normal gaming state (for example, normal gaming state) and a special gaming state (for example, BB gaming state), and in the advantageous section, any gaming state is the normal gaming state or the special gaming state The gaming device (for example, the gaming display device 1) is connectable to a gaming machine (for example, the pachislot gaming machine 2b) which continues the advantageous section until the predetermined termination condition is satisfied regardless of whether ,
Information display means (for example, screen units 11A to 11F) for displaying various information;
Display control means (for example, control unit 100) for controlling the information display means;
Advantageous section determination means (for example, display CPU 101) that determines whether or not the gaming machine is in the advantageous section according to the operation of the gaming machine;
And a special game state determination unit (for example, a display CPU 101) that determines whether or not the game machine is in the special game state according to the operation of the game machine.
The display control means
When it is determined that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section by the advantageous section judging means, and it is judged that the gaming machine is not in the special gaming state by the special gaming state judging section, the information display means Display the status,
When it is determined that the gaming machine is not in the advantageous section by the advantageous section judging means, and it is judged that the gaming machine is in the special gaming state by the special game state judging section, the second information display means Display the status,
When it is determined by the advantageous section judging means that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section, and when the special gaming state judging section judges that the gaming machine is in the special gaming state, the information display means It is characterized in that three states are displayed.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the display of the first state is performed when in the advantageous section and not in the special game state, and when the special game is not in the advantageous section, the display of the second state is The third state is displayed when the game is being performed, and during the advantageous section and in the special game state. Therefore, in the gaming machine, even when a plurality of advantageous gaming states are managed as a series of advantageous sections, information desired by the player can be notified as appropriately as possible.

(Appendix G2)
In addition, the game apparatus according to the present invention is
When the gaming machine starts the advantageous section, it outputs a first signal (for example, an advantageous section signal) to the gaming apparatus until the advantageous section is ended, and starts the special gaming state. A second signal (for example, a bonus in-progress signal) is output to the gaming device until the special gaming state is ended.
The advantageous section judging means judges that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section when the first signal is inputted from the gaming machine.
The special game state determination means determines that the game machine is in the special game state when the second signal is input from the game machine.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the display of the first state, the second state, or the third state is performed according to various signals input from the gaming machine, so the game is more appropriately performed. The state of the aircraft can be reported.

  Further, for example, when management and control of such an advantageous section are performed on the side of the gaming machine, it is necessary to perform control corresponding to that on the side of the gaming apparatus. In particular, in order to notify the player of various information, it is required to appropriately notify the situation of the game during the advantageous section.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and in a gaming machine, even when a plurality of advantageous gaming states are managed as a series of advantageous sections, the game situation in the advantageous sections is appropriate. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming apparatus which can be notified to a player.

(Appendix H1)
In order to achieve the above object, a gaming apparatus according to the present invention is:
When a predetermined start condition (for example, an advantageous section start condition) is satisfied, an advantageous section advantageous to the player is started, and when a predetermined end condition (for example, an advantageous section end condition) is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended. The game has a normal gaming state (for example, normal gaming state) and a special gaming state (for example, BB gaming state), and in the advantageous section, any gaming state is the normal gaming state or the special gaming state The gaming device (for example, the gaming display device 1) is connectable to a gaming machine (for example, the pachislot gaming machine 2b) which continues the advantageous section until the predetermined termination condition is satisfied regardless of whether ,
Information display means (for example, screen units 11A to 11F) for displaying various information;
Display control means (for example, control unit 100) for controlling the information display means;
Advantageous section determination means (for example, display CPU 101) that determines whether or not the gaming machine is in the advantageous section according to the operation of the gaming machine;
Special game state determination means (for example, display CPU 101) that determines whether or not the game machine is in the special game state according to the operation of the game machine;
When it is determined by the advantageous section judging means that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section, whether or not the special game state judging section judges that the gaming machine is in the special game state or not Instead, according to the operation of the gaming machine, the means for counting the number of times of games during the advantageous section counting the number of games during the advantageous section (for example, the advantageous section counter);
When it is determined by the advantageous section judging means that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section, whether or not the special game state judging section judges that the gaming machine is in the special game state or not And a means for counting the number of gaming media acquired during the advantageous section (e.g., an advantageous sector acquisition number counter) for counting the number of acquired gaming media in the advantageous section according to the operation of the gaming machine.
The display control means is capable of causing the information display means to display the counting result by the game number counting means during the advantageous section and the counting result by the gaming media number counting means during the advantageous section. .

  In the gaming apparatus according to the present invention, when in the advantageous section, the number of games played in the advantageous section is counted regardless of whether or not the special gaming state is in progress, and the number of game media acquired in the advantageous section Are also counted and displayed in accordance with the counted results. Therefore, in the gaming machine, even when a plurality of advantageous gaming states are managed as a series of advantageous sections, it is possible to appropriately notify the situation of the gaming in the advantageous sections.

(Appendix H2)
In addition, the game apparatus according to the present invention is
When the gaming machine starts the advantageous section, it outputs a first signal (for example, an advantageous section signal) to the gaming apparatus until the advantageous section is ended, and starts the special gaming state. A second signal (for example, a bonus in-progress signal) is output to the gaming device until the special gaming state is ended, and a unit game is started, the third signal (for example, a medal insertion signal) is It is outputted to the gaming machine, and when the unit game is over and there is payout of gaming media, a fourth signal (for example, a medal payout signal) corresponding to the number of payouts of gaming media is outputted to the gaming machine ,
The advantageous section judging means judges that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section when the first signal is inputted from the gaming machine.
The special gaming state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in the special gaming state when the second signal is input from the gaming machine.
When the third signal is input from the gaming machine, the number-of-games counting means during the advantageous section counts the number of games during the advantageous section,
When the fourth signal is input from the gaming machine, the means for acquiring number of game media acquired during the advantageous section counts the number of acquired gaming media in the advantageous section.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, various judgments and various countings are performed in accordance with various signals input from the gaming machine, so that the state of the gaming machine can be notified more appropriately. be able to.

(Appendix H3)
In addition, the game apparatus according to the present invention is
The display control means
When it is determined that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section by the advantageous section judging means, and it is judged that the gaming machine is not in the special gaming state by the special gaming state judging section, the information display means Display the status,
When it is determined that the gaming machine is not in the advantageous section by the advantageous section judging means, and it is judged that the gaming machine is in the special gaming state by the special game state judging section, the second information display means Display the status,
When it is determined by the advantageous section judging means that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section, and when the special gaming state judging section judges that the gaming machine is in the special gaming state, the information display means It is characterized in that three states are displayed.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the display of the first state is performed when the game is in the advantageous section and not in the special game mode, and is in the second state when the special game is not in the advantageous section. The display is performed, and the display of the third state is performed when in the advantageous section and in the special game state. Therefore, in the gaming machine, even when a plurality of advantageous gaming states are managed as a series of advantageous sections, information desired by the player can be notified as appropriately as possible.

  Further, for example, when management and control of such an advantageous section are performed on the side of the gaming machine, it is necessary to perform control corresponding to that on the side of the gaming apparatus. In particular, in order to notify the player of information regarding the end of the advantageous section, it is required to appropriately notify the information.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and particularly in the gaming machine, even when a plurality of advantageous gaming states are managed as a series of advantageous sections, information regarding the end of the advantageous sections. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming apparatus capable of appropriately notifying

(Appendix I1)
In order to achieve the above object, a gaming apparatus according to the present invention is:
When a predetermined start condition (for example, an advantageous section start condition) is satisfied, an advantageous section advantageous to the player is started, and when a predetermined end condition (for example, an advantageous section end condition) is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended. The game has a normal gaming state (for example, normal gaming state) and a special gaming state (for example, BB gaming state), and in the advantageous section, any gaming state is the normal gaming state or the special gaming state The gaming device (for example, the gaming display device 1) is connectable to a gaming machine (for example, the pachislot gaming machine 2b) which continues the advantageous section until the predetermined termination condition is satisfied regardless of whether ,
Information display means (for example, screen units 11A to 11F) for displaying various information;
Display control means (for example, control unit 100) for controlling the information display means;
Advantageous section determination means (for example, display CPU 101) that determines whether or not the gaming machine is in the advantageous section according to the operation of the gaming machine;
Special game state determination means (for example, display CPU 101) that determines whether or not the game machine is in the special game state according to the operation of the game machine;
When it is determined by the advantageous section judging means that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section, whether or not the special game state judging section judges that the gaming machine is in the special game state or not And a means for counting the number of games played during the advantageous section (for example, an advantageous section counter) for counting the number of games played in the advantageous section in accordance with the operation of the gaming machine.
When the specific display start condition associated with the predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example, when the advantageous area counter becomes “1495” or more), the display control means plays the remaining games of the advantageous area Information indicating the number of times or information indicating the end of the advantageous section is displayed on the information display means.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when a specific display start condition associated with the termination condition of the advantageous segment is satisfied, information indicating the number of remaining games played in the advantageous segment, or indicating that the advantageous segment is terminated. Information is to be notified. Therefore, in the gaming machine, even when a plurality of advantageous gaming states are managed as a series of advantageous sections, it is possible to appropriately notify information on the end of the advantageous sections, in particular.

(Appendix I2)
In addition, the game apparatus according to the present invention is
When the gaming machine starts the advantageous section, it outputs a first signal (for example, an advantageous section signal) to the gaming apparatus until the advantageous section is ended, and starts the special gaming state. A second signal (for example, a bonus in-progress signal) is output to the gaming device until the special gaming state is ended, and a unit game is started, the third signal (for example, a medal insertion signal) is Output to the gaming device,
The advantageous section judging means judges that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section when the first signal is inputted from the gaming machine.
The special gaming state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in the special gaming state when the second signal is input from the gaming machine.
When the third signal during the advantageous section is input from the gaming machine, the game number counting means counts the number of games during the advantageous section.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, various judgments and various countings are performed in accordance with various signals input from the gaming machine, so that the state of the gaming machine can be notified more appropriately. be able to.

(Appendix I3)
In addition, the game apparatus according to the present invention is
The display control means
When it is determined that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section by the advantageous section judging means, and it is judged that the gaming machine is not in the special gaming state by the special gaming state judging section, the information display means Display the status,
When it is determined that the gaming machine is not in the advantageous section by the advantageous section judging means, and it is judged that the gaming machine is in the special gaming state by the special game state judging section, the second information display means Display the status,
When it is determined by the advantageous section judging means that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section, and when the special gaming state judging section judges that the gaming machine is in the special gaming state, the information display means It is characterized in that three states are displayed.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the display of the first state is performed when the game is in the advantageous section and not in the special game mode, and is in the second state when the special game is not in the advantageous section. The display is performed, and the display of the third state is performed when in the advantageous section and in the special game state. Therefore, in the gaming machine, even when a plurality of advantageous gaming states are managed as a series of advantageous sections, information desired by the player can be notified as appropriately as possible.

  Further, for example, when management and control of such an advantageous section are performed on the side of the gaming machine, it is necessary to perform control corresponding to that on the side of the gaming apparatus. In particular, in order to notify the player of various information, it is necessary to properly grasp the number of times of gaming in the advantageous section of the gaming machine, and also appropriately grasp the number of times of gaming in the normal gaming state of the gaming machine. There is a need to. Then, it is required to appropriately notify information on the number of games.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and while being able to appropriately grasp the number of games during the advantageous section of the gaming machine, it is also possible to appropriately grasp the number of games during the normal gaming state in the gaming machine, An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming apparatus capable of appropriately notifying information on the number of times of playing.

(Appendix J1)
In order to achieve the above object, a gaming apparatus according to the present invention is:
When a predetermined start condition (for example, an advantageous section start condition) is satisfied, an advantageous section advantageous to the player is started, and when a predetermined end condition (for example, an advantageous section end condition) is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended. The game has a normal gaming state (for example, normal gaming state) and a special gaming state (for example, BB gaming state), and at least a first number (for example, three sheets) of gaming media is inserted in the normal gaming state Enables the start of the game, and in the special game state, enables the start of the game when a second number (for example, two) of game media are inserted, and in the advantageous section, the game state A game machine (for example, a pachi) which continues the advantageous section until the predetermined end condition is satisfied regardless of which of the normal gaming state and the special gaming state the game condition is. B game machine 2b) to the game device connectable (e.g., a gaming display device 1),
Information display means (for example, screen units 11A to 11F) for displaying various information;
Display control means (for example, control unit 100) for controlling the information display means;
Advantageous section determination means (for example, display CPU 101) that determines whether or not the gaming machine is in the advantageous section according to the operation of the gaming machine;
Special game state determination means (for example, display CPU 101) that determines whether or not the game machine is in the special game state according to the operation of the game machine;
When it is determined by the advantageous section judging means that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section, whether or not the special game state judging section judges that the gaming machine is in the special game state or not Instead, according to the operation of the gaming machine, the means for counting the number of times of games during the advantageous section counting the number of games during the advantageous section (for example, the advantageous section counter);
When it is determined by the special gaming state determination means that the gaming machine is in the normal gaming state not in the special gaming state, the advantageous section determination means determines that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section A game number counting means (for example, a game number counter) in a normal gaming state which counts the number of games in the normal gaming state according to the operation of the gaming machine regardless of whether or not
The gaming machine outputs a predetermined signal (for example, a medal insertion signal) to the gaming device when a unit game is started.
The predetermined signal is a signal capable of identifying which one of the first number and the second number of game media has been inserted,
When the predetermined signal is input from the gaming machine, the advantageous section middle number-of-playings counting means does not matter which of the first number or the second number of gaming media is inserted, when the predetermined signal is input from the gaming machine. Count the number of games played in the advantageous section,
When the predetermined signal is input from the gaming machine, the normal game state game number counting means counts the number of games in the normal game state when the first number of game media is inserted. Count
The display control means can display on the information display means the counting result by the game number counting means during the advantageous section and the counting result by the game number counting means during the normal gaming state.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, during the advantageous section, the number of games played during the advantageous section is counted regardless of whether or not the special gaming mode is in effect, and when the normal gaming mode is in progress, the advantageous section is Regardless of whether or not, the number of games in the normal gaming state is counted. Then, when in the advantageous section, regardless of the number of inserted game media in the unit game, the number of games in the advantageous section is counted, and when in the normal gaming state, the game media is inserted in the unit game When the number is a predetermined number (for example, three), the number of games in the normal gaming state is counted. Therefore, while being able to grasp the number of games during the advantageous section in the gaming machine appropriately, it is also possible to appropriately grasp the number of games in the normal gaming state in the gaming machine, and it is possible to appropriately inform information on the number of these games. .

(Appendix J2)
In addition, the game apparatus according to the present invention is
When the gaming machine starts the advantageous section, it outputs a first signal (for example, an advantageous section signal) to the gaming apparatus until the advantageous section is ended, and starts the special gaming state. A second signal (for example, a bonus in-progress signal) is output to the gaming device until the special gaming state is ended.
The advantageous section judging means judges that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section when the first signal is inputted from the gaming machine.
The special game state determination means determines that the game machine is in the special game state when the second signal is input from the game machine.

  Further, in the gaming apparatus according to the present invention, various determinations are performed in accordance with various signals input from the gaming machine, so that the state of the gaming machine can be notified more appropriately.

  Further, for example, when management and control of such an advantageous section are performed on the side of the gaming machine, it is necessary to perform control corresponding to that on the side of the gaming apparatus. In particular, in order to notify a player of information on the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section, it is required to appropriately notify the information.

  The present invention has been made in view of these points, and in the gaming machine, a plurality of advantageous gaming states are managed as a series of advantageous sections, and a standby period is provided in the advantageous sections. In particular, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming apparatus capable of appropriately notifying information on the number of acquired gaming media in an advantageous section.

(Appendix K1)
In order to achieve the above object, a gaming apparatus according to the present invention is:
When a predetermined start condition (for example, an advantageous section start condition) is satisfied, an advantageous section advantageous to the player is started, and when a predetermined end condition (for example, an advantageous section end condition) is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended. The game has a normal gaming state (for example, normal gaming state) and a special gaming state (for example, BB gaming state), and in the advantageous section, any gaming state is the normal gaming state or the special gaming state The gaming device (for example, the gaming display device 1) is connectable to a gaming machine (for example, the pachislot gaming machine 2b) which continues the advantageous section until the predetermined termination condition is satisfied regardless of whether ,
Information display means (for example, screen units 11A to 11F) for displaying various information;
Display control means (for example, control unit 100) for controlling the information display means;
Advantageous section determination means (for example, display CPU 101) that determines whether or not the gaming machine is in the advantageous section according to the operation of the gaming machine;
Special game state determination means (for example, display CPU 101) that determines whether or not the game machine is in the special game state according to the operation of the game machine;
When it is determined by the advantageous section judging means that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section, whether or not the special game state judging section judges that the gaming machine is in the special game state or not And a means for counting the number of gaming media acquired during the advantageous section (e.g., an advantageous sector acquisition number counter) for counting the number of acquired gaming media in the advantageous section according to the operation of the gaming machine.
When the gaming machine decides to shift from the normal gaming state to the special gaming state, it is possible to establish the predetermined start condition, and shifts from the normal gaming state to the special gaming state Is determined to be a standby section of the advantageous section after transition to the special game state, and when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the first signal (for example, the first signal (eg, the first signal) When the special game state is started by outputting the advantageous section signal) to the game apparatus, the second signal (for example, a bonus in-progress signal) is output to the game apparatus until the special game state is ended. When a unit game is over and there is a payout of gaming media, a third signal (for example, a medal payout signal) corresponding to the number of payouts of gaming media is output to the gaming device,
The advantageous section judging means judges that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section when the first signal is inputted from the gaming machine.
The special gaming state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in the special gaming state when the second signal is input from the gaming machine.
During the advantageous section, the gaming machine number counting unit determines that the gaming machine is selected by the special game state determining unit within a predetermined period after the advantageous section determining unit determines that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section. When it is determined that the special gaming state is in effect, the predetermined period is determined to be the standby section, and the number of game media acquired in the predetermined period is counted as the number of game media acquired in the advantageous section. Without
It is characterized in that the display control means can cause the information display means to display the counting result by the acquired game media number counting means during the advantageous section.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the advantageous section of the gaming machine starts after the predetermined standby section, the number of game media acquired in the predetermined standby section is the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section. It does not count as. Therefore, even when the standby period is provided in the advantageous section in the gaming machine, it is possible to appropriately notify information on the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section.

(Appendix K2)
In addition, the game apparatus according to the present invention is
The means for counting the number of gaming media acquired during the advantageous section is
The game machine further comprises a game media counting means (for example, a temporary counting counter) acquired during the waiting period for counting the number of gaming media acquired in the predetermined period,
If the counting result by the gaming media number counting means acquired during the waiting interval is a positive value, the counting result is counted as the number of gaming media acquired in the advantageous segment,
The display control means, when the advantageous section is started,
If the counting result by the gaming media number counting means acquired during the waiting section is a positive value, the information displaying means is caused to display the counting result by the gaming media number counting means during the advantageous section including the counting result.
If the counting result by the game media counting means acquired during the standby section is a negative value, the information display of a predetermined initial value (for example, "0") as the counting result by the game media counting means acquired during the advantageous zone Displayed on means.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, if the number of acquired game media is increased in the predetermined standby section, it is counted retroactively as the number of acquired game media in the advantageous zone, and including it. If the acquired number of gaming media has decreased, the predetermined initial value is displayed as the number of gaming media acquired in the advantageous segment when the advantageous segment is actually started. May be This makes it possible not only to more appropriately display the information on the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section, but also to prevent the player from feeling discomfort by the display.

  In the gaming information display device connected to an operable gaming machine, a state advantageous to the player (ART) notified of the procedure of the stopping operation (stopping operation sequence) advantageous for the player in recent years is output from the gaming machine When the predetermined signal (ART signal) indicating that the advantageous state is in effect is in the on state, an effect display indicating that the advantageous state is in effect is provided, and in the event that the predetermined signal is in the off state, the effect is indicated. What made it possible to complete an effect display is proposed (for example, refer to JP, 2015-96100, A).

  By the way, like the above-described gaming machine, it is preferable if the start and end of the state advantageous to the player can be recognized on the gaming device side, but if they can not be recognized on the gaming device side, A device for performing effect display linked to the start and end of the advantageous state is required. In particular, with regard to the termination of the advantageous state, many gaming machines do not have a specification that can be recognized by the gaming apparatus, and even if the gaming machine is connected to a gaming machine having such a specification, it is possible to It is considered necessary to prevent as much as possible that

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and even if it is not possible to clearly recognize the end of the advantageous state for the player in the gaming machine, the gaming apparatus side can display An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming apparatus capable of preventing the occurrence of wrinkles as much as possible.

(Appendix L1)
In order to achieve the above object, a gaming apparatus according to the present invention is:
When a predetermined start condition (for example, an advantageous section start condition) is satisfied, an advantageous section advantageous to the player is started, and when a predetermined end condition (for example, an advantageous section end condition) is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended. In the section, when at least a specific combination (for example, push order small combination 1 to 6) is won, a gaming machine (for example, the procedure of a stop operation to be paid out a specific number (for example, nine pieces) of gaming media is notified A game apparatus (for example, the game display apparatus 1) connectable to the pachislot game machine 2b),
Information display means (for example, screen units 11A to 11F) for displaying various information;
Display control means (for example, control unit 100) for controlling the information display means;
Advantageous section start determination means (for example, display CPU 101) for determining whether or not the advantageous section is started in the gaming machine according to the operation of the gaming machine;
Specific game medium number payout determination means (for example, display CPU 101) that determines whether or not the specified number of game media have been paid out during the advantageous section in the game machine according to the operation of the game machine;
Advantageous section end determination means (for example, display CPU 101) for determining whether or not the advantageous section is ended in the gaming machine according to the operation of the gaming machine;
The display control means
When it is determined by the advantageous section start determining unit that the advantageous section is started in the gaming machine, display of a specific state is started in the information display unit,
When it is determined by the specified game medium number payout determination means that the game machine has paid out the specified number of game media in the advantageous section, termination of the display of the specific state in the information display means is possible. State,
If it is determined that the display of the specific state can be ended when it is determined by the advantageous area end determination means that the advantageous area is ended in the gaming machine, the information display means displays the specific state. It is characterized by ending.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the display of the specific state corresponding to the advantageous section can be ended when the specified number of gaming media is paid out during the advantageous state (advantageous section) for the player. When it is determined that the advantageous section is ended, the display of the specific state is ended if the display of the specific state can be ended. Therefore, even if it is not possible to clearly recognize the end of the advantageous section in the gaming machine on the gaming apparatus side, it is possible to prevent the display content from being wrinkled as much as possible.

(Appendix L2)
In addition, the game apparatus according to the present invention is
The gaming machine is in a first normal gaming state (for example, a low RT gaming state) in which the probability of winning a predetermined combination (for example, replay role) in which replaying is activated is low (for example, a low RT gaming state) (For example, in the high RT gaming state), in the advantageous section, the procedure of the stop operation in which the second normal gaming state is maintained is notified, and the first start condition is satisfied; When a signal (for example, an advantageous section signal) is output to the gaming device and the unit game is over and there is a payout of gaming media, a second signal (for example, a medal payout signal) corresponding to the number of payouts of gaming media Output to the gaming device,
When the first signal is inputted from the gaming machine, the advantageous zone start judging means judges that the advantageous zone is started in the gaming machine,
The specified game medium number payout determination means determines that the specified number of game media have been paid out, when the second signal corresponding to the specified number is input from the game machine.
When the number of payouts of gaming media in a predetermined period falls below a predetermined threshold based on the second signal input from the gaming machine, the advantageous section end determination means determines that It is characterized in that it is determined that the advantageous section is ended.

  Further, in the gaming apparatus according to the present invention, various determinations are performed in accordance with various signals input from the gaming machine, so that the state of the gaming machine can be more appropriately recognized.

  By the way, like the above-described gaming machine, it is preferable if the start and end of the state advantageous to the player can be recognized on the gaming device side, but if they can not be recognized on the gaming device side, A device for performing effect display linked to the start and end of the advantageous state is required. In particular, with regard to the termination of the advantageous state, many gaming machines do not have a specification that can be recognized by the gaming apparatus, and even if the gaming machine is connected to a gaming machine having such a specification, it is possible to It is considered necessary to prevent as much as possible that

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and even if it is not possible to clearly recognize the end of the advantageous state for the player in the gaming machine, the gaming apparatus side can display It is possible to provide a gaming apparatus capable of preventing as much as possible the occurrence of a bribery, and further capable of accurately recognizing the possibility of the occurrence of a malfunction or an illegal act on the game arcade side. To aim.

(Appendix M1)
In order to achieve the above object, a gaming apparatus according to the present invention is:
When a predetermined start condition (for example, an advantageous section start condition) is satisfied, an advantageous section advantageous to the player is started, and when a predetermined end condition (for example, an advantageous section end condition) is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended. The game has a normal gaming state (for example, normal gaming state) and a special gaming state (for example, BB gaming state), and in the advantageous section, any gaming state is the normal gaming state or the special gaming state The gaming device (for example, the gaming display device 1) is connectable to a gaming machine (for example, the pachislot gaming machine 2b) which continues the advantageous section until the predetermined termination condition is satisfied regardless of whether ,
Information display means (for example, screen units 11A to 11F) for displaying various information;
Display control means (for example, control unit 100) for controlling the information display means;
Advantageous section start determination means (for example, display CPU 101) for determining whether or not the advantageous section is started in the gaming machine according to the operation of the gaming machine;
Advantageous section end determination means (for example, display CPU 101) for determining whether or not the advantageous section is ended in the game machine according to the operation of the game machine;
Special game state determination means (for example, display CPU 101) that determines whether or not the game machine is in the special game state according to the operation of the game machine;
When it is determined by the advantageous section start determining unit that the inside of the advantageous section is started in the gaming machine, the special section end determining unit determines that the special section is determined to be ended in the gaming machine. Regardless of whether or not the gaming state is determined to be in the special gaming state by the gaming state determination means, according to the operation of the gaming machine, according to the operation of the gaming machine, the game during the advantageous section counting the number of games during the advantageous section A frequency counting unit (eg, an advantageous interval counter);
The display control means does not determine that the advantageous section is ended in the gaming machine by the advantageous section end determination means, but the counting result by the game number counting means during the advantageous section corresponds to the predetermined end condition The special information (for example, an error display) is displayed on the information display means when the specified number of games defined (for example, the advantageous section counter becomes "1550").

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when it is determined that the number of times of game play in the advantageous section reaches a specific number of games, without being determined that the advantageous state (advantage zone) for the player is ended, the special It is designed to display information. Therefore, even if it is not possible to clearly recognize the end of the advantageous section in the gaming machine on the gaming machine side, it is possible to prevent the display contents from being wrinkled as much as possible, and furthermore, the problem It is also possible for the game arcade side to accurately recognize the possibility of the occurrence of or an illegal act.

(Appendix M2)
In addition, the game apparatus according to the present invention is
The gaming machine has a low probability of winning a predetermined combination (e.g., a replay combination) in which a replay is activated as the normal gaming state. A second normal gaming state (for example, high RT gaming state) is provided, and in the advantageous section, a procedure of a stop operation in which at least the second normal gaming state is maintained is notified, and the predetermined start condition is satisfied. If so, a first signal (for example, an advantage section signal) is output to the gaming device, and when a unit game is over and there is payout of gaming media, a second signal (for example, , And a medal payout signal) to the gaming machine,
When the first signal is inputted from the gaming machine, the advantageous zone start judging means judges that the advantageous zone is started in the gaming machine,
When the number of payouts of gaming media in a predetermined period falls below a predetermined threshold based on the second signal input from the gaming machine, the advantageous section end determination means determines that It is characterized in that it is determined that the advantageous section is ended.

  Further, in the gaming apparatus according to the present invention, various determinations are performed in accordance with various signals input from the gaming machine, so that the state of the gaming machine can be more appropriately recognized.

  In recent years, in a gaming information display device connected to an operable gaming machine, an advantageous state (ART) for a player notified of a procedure (stopping operation sequence) of a stop operation advantageous for the player in a gaming machine When an advantageous state ("ART") of the game is activated and when a second advantageous state ("S-ART") is activated in the gaming machine, which is advantageous over the first advantageous state. What made it possible to perform effect display is proposed (for example, refer to JP, 2015-96100, A).

  By the way, like the gaming machine described above, although it is preferable if the type of the state advantageous to the player can be recognized on the gaming device side, it is preferable if they are not recognizable on the gaming device side. It is necessary to devise a device for performing effect display linked to the type of state. At that time, it is considered necessary to prevent an excessive control burden on the gaming apparatus side.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and even in the case where the gaming machine has a plurality of advantageous states having different durations, the simple configuration is made in any advantageous state. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming apparatus capable of appropriately notifying information on the presence or absence.

(Appendix N1)
In order to achieve the above object, a gaming apparatus according to the present invention is:
When a first start condition (for example, advantageous section start condition A) is satisfied, a first advantageous section advantageous for the player is started, and when a first end condition (for example, advantageous section end condition A) is satisfied, the first When the advantageous section is ended and the second start condition (for example, advantageous section start condition B) is satisfied, the second advantageous section for the player is started, and the second end condition (for example, advantageous section end condition B) Is terminated, and the gaming machine (for example, the pachislot gaming machine 2b) is notified of the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player in the first and second advantageous sections. A connectable game device (for example, the game display device 1),
Information display means (for example, screen units 11A to 11F) for displaying various information;
Display control means (for example, control unit 100) for controlling the information display means;
Advantageous section determination means (for example, display CPU 101) for determining whether or not the gaming machine is in the first advantageous section or the second advantageous section according to the operation of the gaming machine;
When it is determined by the advantageous section judging means that the gaming machine is in the first advantageous section or the second advantageous section, the number of games in the advantageous section is counted according to the operation of the gaming machine And means for counting the number of games played during the advantageous section (e.g., an advantageous section counter);
The gaming machine has, as gaming states, a normal gaming state, a first specific gaming state (for example, MB1 gaming state) and a second specific gaming state (for example, MB2 gaming state), and from the normal gaming state When it is determined to shift to the first specific gaming state, the first start condition is satisfied, and during the first specific gaming state as the first advantageous section, the first specific gaming state If the first end condition is satisfied, the second end condition is that the number of possible games (for example, "50" times) of the second advantageous section is game playable of the first advantageous section The first end condition or the second end condition is set so as to be greater than the number of times (for example, “2” times) and at least the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. The first signal (eg, And outputs a benefit interval signal) to the gaming device,
The advantageous section judging means judges that the gaming machine is in the first advantageous section or the second advantageous section when the first signal is inputted from the gaming machine.
When the display control means determines that the gaming machine is in the first advantageous section or the second advantageous section by the advantageous section determination section in the information display section, the number of games played during the advantageous section The display of a predetermined state is performed until the counting result by the counting means reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, “2” times) predetermined as the number of possible games of the first advantageous section, and the specific number of times is exceeded. In this case, the display of the specific state is started.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when there are a plurality of advantageous states (the first advantageous section and the second advantageous section) having different durations, the number of games in the advantageous section is relatively continued. The display of the predetermined state is performed until the specific number of times (for example, two times) predetermined as the game play number of the short first advantageous section is reached, and the display of the specific state is started when the specific number of times is exceeded. It is supposed to be. Therefore, even in the case where the gaming machine has a plurality of advantageous states having different durations, it is possible to appropriately notify information on which advantageous state is in progress with a simple configuration.

(Appendix N2)
In addition, the game apparatus according to the present invention is
When it is determined by the advantageous section judging means that the gaming machine is in the first advantageous section or the second advantageous section, the game medium is acquired in the advantageous section according to the operation of the gaming machine The game machine further comprises means for counting the number of gaming media acquired during the advantageous interval for counting the number (for example, the advantageous interval acquired number counter).
The gaming machine outputs a second signal (for example, a medal payout signal) corresponding to the number of payouts of the game medium to the gaming apparatus when the unit game ends and the game medium is paid out,
When the second signal is input from the gaming machine, the number of game media acquired during the advantageous section counting means counts the number of acquired gaming media in the advantageous section,
The display control means is characterized in that when the display of the specific state is started in the information display means, the display of the counting result by the acquired game medium number counting means during the advantageous section is started.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, as the display of the specific state is started, the display of the acquired number of gaming media in the advantageous section is also started. This makes it possible not only to more appropriately display information on the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section, but also to allow the player to have a sense of expectation and to improve the interest of the game.

  In recent years, notification of the procedure of the stop operation (stop operation order) which is advantageous for the player maintains the gaming state (high RT gaming state) with high probability of winning the replay combination, and also the establishment probability of the small winning combination. In the gaming information display device connected to a gaming machine capable of operating an advantageous state (ART) for a player who is improving, it is proposed that it is possible to perform effect display interlocked with the start and end of the advantageous state. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-96100).

  By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, when it is determined to shift to a state advantageous to the player, notification of the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is started, but until transition to the high RT gaming state is made. It will not be the most advantageous state. That is, the timing at which the advantageous state is started is different from the timing at which the most advantageous state is started. In this case, by counting the number of acquired gaming media in the uniformly advantageous state and displaying the acquired number of gaming media in the advantageous state accordingly, acquiring the gaming medium during the advantageous state. The number may not be reported properly.

  The present invention has been made in view of these points, and is advantageous even when the timing at which an advantageous state is started in the gaming machine is different from the timing at which the most advantageous state is started. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming apparatus capable of appropriately notifying information on the number of acquired gaming media in a state.

(Appendix O1)
In order to achieve the above object, a gaming apparatus according to the present invention is:
When a predetermined start condition (for example, an advantageous section start condition) is satisfied, an advantageous section advantageous to the player is started, and when a predetermined end condition (for example, an advantageous section end condition) is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended. The first gaming state (for example, low RT gaming state) with a low winning probability of a predetermined role (for example, replay role) in which the replay is activated as the second gaming state (for example, a high RT gaming with a high winning probability of the predetermined role) A game machine having a state) and continuing the advantageous section until the predetermined end condition is satisfied regardless of which of the first gaming state and the second gaming state is the gaming state. (For example, a gaming device (for example, the gaming display device 1) connectable to the pachislot gaming machine 2b)
Information display means (for example, screen units 11A to 11F) for displaying various information;
Display control means (for example, control unit 100) for controlling the information display means;
Advantageous section determination means (for example, display CPU 101) that determines whether or not the gaming machine is in the advantageous section according to the operation of the gaming machine;
Second gaming state determination means (for example, display CPU 101) that determines whether or not the gaming machine is in the second gaming state according to the operation of the gaming machine;
When it is determined by the advantageous section judging means that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section, the second gaming state judging section judges that the gaming machine is not in the second gaming state and the first game When it is determined that the game is in a state, counting means for counting the number of gaming media acquired during the normal advantageous interval (for example, a temporary counting counter) which counts the number of gaming media acquired during the advantageous interval according to the operation of the gaming machine )When,
It is determined that the gaming machine is in the advantageous segment by the advantageous segment determining means, and the gaming machine is determined to be in the second gaming state by the second gaming state determining means. And a game medium counting means (for example, an advantageous area acquisition number counter) acquired during the special advantageous period for counting the number of acquired gaming media in the advantageous area according to the operation of the gaming machine, if any.
The display control means is a case where it is determined that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section by the advantageous section judging means, and the gaming machine is in the second gaming state by the second gaming state judging means. When it is determined, the counting result by the game media counting means acquired during the special advantage zone is updated based on the counting result by the gaming medium number counting means during the normal advantage zone, and the update result is displayed as the information It is characterized by displaying on a means.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention counts the number of acquired gaming media even when it is not in a specific RT gaming state and is in a gaming state (advantage zone) which is advantageous to the player, and is specified during the advantageous zone. When the RT gaming state of is reached, the number of acquired gaming media in the advantageous section is updated including this counting result, and the updating result is displayed. Therefore, even when the timing when the advantageous state is started in the gaming machine is different from the timing when the most advantageous state is started, the information on the number of acquired gaming media in the advantageous state is appropriately notified. be able to.

(Appendix O2)
In addition, the game apparatus according to the present invention is
The display control means
In the case where it is determined that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section by the advantageous section judging means, and it is judged that the gaming machine is not in the second gaming state by the second gaming state judging section, the information display section Display a predetermined state (for example, the first state),
When it is determined that the gaming machine is in the advantageous segment by the advantageous section judging means, and when it is judged that the gaming machine is in the second gaming state by the second gaming state judging means, the information display means The display of the specific state (for example, the third state) is performed in

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the game is in the advantageous section and not in the specific RT gaming mode, the display of the predetermined state (first state) is performed, and the specific RT gaming state is in the advantageous section. When the display is in the middle, the display of the specific state (third state) is performed. Thereby, even when the timing at which the advantageous state is started in the gaming machine is different from the timing at which the most advantageous state is started, the information desired by the player can be notified as appropriately as possible. it can.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Display device for games, 2 ... game machine, 2a ... pachinko game machine, 2b ... pachislot machine, 3 ... gaming medium lending device, 3a ... gaming ball lending device, 3b ... medal lending device, 10 ... housing, 11A 11 F: Screen unit, 110 A to 110 F: Screen (projected portion), 1100: Incident surface (light guide), 1101: Display surface (display), 12: Projector main body (projection means), 13: Reflector, 14 ... Operation unit, 30 ... Movable decorative sheet, 40 ... Fixed decorative sheet, 70 ... Base, 71 ... Light emitting element (LED), 72 ... Diffuse reflection part, 73-75 ... Light shielding member, G1 ... Game device, G101 ... Base body, G61a: aperture, G61: light guide plate, G61b: aperture side end face, G60A: LED, G61d: reflective portion, G60: LED substrate, G60e, G61e: alignment portion, G1 1e ... alignment member, F1 ... device for a game, F1021b ... translucent portion, F1021 ... outer panel, F1021a ... touch area, F 1022 ... touch sensor, F1024 ... LED array, F1023 ... light guide plate, F10250 ... control circuit

Claims (3)

When a predetermined start condition is established, an advantageous section advantageous to the player is started, and when a predetermined end condition is established, the advantageous section is ended, and the game section has a normal gaming state and a special gaming state. In the game machine, it is possible to connect to a gaming machine capable of continuing the advantageous section until the predetermined end condition is satisfied regardless of which of the normal gaming state and the special gaming state is the gaming state. A device,
Information display means for displaying various information;
Display control means for controlling the information display means;
Advantageous section determination means for determining whether or not the gaming machine is in the advantageous section in accordance with the operation of the gaming machine;
Special game state determination means for determining whether or not the game machine is in the special game state according to the operation of the game machine;
When it is determined by the advantageous section judging means that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section, whether or not the special game state judging section judges that the gaming machine is in the special game state or not And the advantageous section counting means for counting the number of games during the advantageous section according to the operation of the gaming machine.
The display control means is information indicating the number of remaining games played in the advantageous section or information indicating that the advantageous section is ended when a specific display start condition associated with the predetermined end condition is satisfied. A game apparatus for displaying information on the information display means. When the gaming machine starts the advantageous section, it outputs a first signal to the gaming apparatus until the advantageous section is ended, and when the special gaming state is started, the special gaming state is ended. The second signal is output to the gaming device until the unit game is started, the third signal is output to the gaming device, and the unit game is over, and there is a payout of gaming media, the game The fourth signal corresponding to the number of payouts of the medium is output to the gaming device,
The advantageous section judging means judges that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section when the first signal is inputted from the gaming machine.
The special gaming state determination means determines that the gaming machine is in the special gaming state when the second signal is input from the gaming machine.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the game number counting means in the advantageous section counts the number of games in the advantageous section when the third signal is input from the gaming machine. . The display control means
When it is determined that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section by the advantageous section judging means, and it is judged that the gaming machine is not in the special gaming state by the special gaming state judging section, the information display means Display the status,
When it is determined that the gaming machine is not in the advantageous section by the advantageous section judging means, and it is judged that the gaming machine is in the special gaming state by the special game state judging section, the second information display means Display the status,
When it is determined by the advantageous section judging means that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section, and when the special gaming state judging section judges that the gaming machine is in the special gaming state, the information display means The game apparatus according to claim 1 or 2, wherein display of three states is performed.

Images